Remove IEEE 695 object support
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
219d1afa 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 27@set M68K
833794fc 28@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
35c08157 31@set NDS32
78058a5e 32@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 35@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 36@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
219d1afa 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
219d1afa 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 136@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
137@ifset ARM
138* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
139@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
140@ifset M68HC11
141* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
142@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
146@ifset M68K
147* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
148@end ifset
833794fc
MR
149@ifset MIPS
150* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
151@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
152@ifset POWERPC
153* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC64
156* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
158@ifset S/390
159* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifclear SingleFormat
381@cindex binary input format
382@kindex -b @var{format}
383@kindex --format=@var{format}
384@cindex input format
385@cindex input format
386@item -b @var{input-format}
387@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
388@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
389file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 390@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 391that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 392configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 393to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
394default input format the most usual format on each machine.
395@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
396supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
397formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
398@xref{BFD}.
399
400You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
401binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
402linking object files of different formats), by including
403@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 404particular format.
252b5132
RH
405
406The default format is taken from the environment variable
407@code{GNUTARGET}.
408@ifset UsesEnvVars
409@xref{Environment}.
410@end ifset
411You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
412@code{TARGET};
413@ifclear man
414see @ref{Format Commands}.
415@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
416@end ifclear
417
418@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
419@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@cindex compatibility, MRI
421@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
422@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 423For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 424files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
425@ifclear man
426@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
427@end ifclear
428@ifset man
429the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
430@end ifset
431Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 432the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
433scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
434If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
435specified by any @samp{-L} options.
436
437@cindex common allocation
438@kindex -d
439@kindex -dc
440@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 441@item -d
252b5132
RH
442@itemx -dc
443@itemx -dp
444These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
445compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
446even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
447script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
448@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
449
7ee314fa
AM
450@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
451@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
452@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
455@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
456specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
457will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
458option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 459The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 460
252b5132
RH
461@cindex entry point, from command line
462@kindex -e @var{entry}
463@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 464@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
465@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
466Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
467program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
468named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
469and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
470base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
471@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
472and other ways of specifying the entry point.
473
b58f81ae
DJ
474@kindex --exclude-libs
475@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
476Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 477exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
478@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
479automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
480port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
481explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
482option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
483be treated as hidden.
484
e1c37eb5
DK
485@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
486@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
487Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
488should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
489into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
490may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
491used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
492the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
493match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
494command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
495of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
496regardless of this option.
497
252b5132
RH
498@cindex dynamic symbol table
499@kindex -E
500@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 501@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
502@item -E
503@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
504@itemx --no-export-dynamic
505When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
506option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
507all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
508set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
509
510If you do not use either of these options (or use the
511@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
512dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
513referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
514
515If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
516back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
517dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
518linking the program itself.
519
55255dae 520You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 521be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 522See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 523
8b747e1a
DK
524Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
525support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
526the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
527
36f63dca 528@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
529@cindex big-endian objects
530@cindex endianness
531@kindex -EB
532@item -EB
533Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
534
535@cindex little-endian objects
536@kindex -EL
537@item -EL
538Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 539@end ifclear
252b5132 540
2509a395
SL
541@kindex -f @var{name}
542@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
543@item -f @var{name}
544@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
545When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
546to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
547table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
548symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
549
550If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
551run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
552the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
553first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
554@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
555in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
556Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
557implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
558machine specific performance.
559
560This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
561will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
562
2509a395
SL
563@kindex -F @var{name}
564@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 565@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 566@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
567When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
568the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
569of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
570on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
571
572If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
573run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
574dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
575filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
576found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
577used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
578@var{name}.
579
ff5dcc92 580Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 581toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
582object files.
583@ifclear SingleFormat
584The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 585@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 586@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
587environment variable.
588@end ifclear
589The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
590creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 591
3dbf70a2 592@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
593@kindex -fini=@var{name}
594@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
595When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
596executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
597address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
598the function to call.
599
252b5132
RH
600@kindex -g
601@item -g
602Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
603
2509a395
SL
604@kindex -G @var{value}
605@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 606@cindex object size
2509a395 607@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
608@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
609Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
610@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 611MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
612sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
613
614@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 615@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 616@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 617@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
618@itemx -soname=@var{name}
619When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
620the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
621which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
622linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
623field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
624
625@kindex -i
626@cindex incremental link
627@item -i
628Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
629
3dbf70a2 630@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
631@kindex -init=@var{name}
632@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
633When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
634executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
635of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
636function to call.
637
252b5132 638@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 639@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 640@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 641@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
642@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
643Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
644list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
645If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 646will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 647will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 648
ff5dcc92 649On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
650files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
651and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
652called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
653@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
654indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
655to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
656@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
657
658The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
659specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
660was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
661command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
662archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
663the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
664
ff5dcc92 665See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
666archives multiple times.
667
668You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
669
670@ifset GENERIC
671This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 672if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
673behaviour of the AIX linker.
674@end ifset
675
676@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 677@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 678@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 679@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 680@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
681Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
682for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
683option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
684in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
685on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 686@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
687order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
688how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
689option is specified.
252b5132 690
3aa2d05a
NC
691If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
692prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
693@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 694
252b5132
RH
695@ifset UsesEnvVars
696The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 697@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
698some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
699@end ifset
700
701The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
702@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
703at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
704
705@cindex emulation
706@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 707@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
708Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
709emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
710
711If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
712@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
713
714Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
715configured.
716
717@cindex link map
718@kindex -M
719@kindex --print-map
720@item -M
721@itemx --print-map
722Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
723information about the link, including the following:
724
725@itemize @bullet
726@item
3b83e13a 727Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
728@item
729How common symbols are allocated.
730@item
731All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
732which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
733@item
734The values assigned to symbols.
735
736Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
737involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
738have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
739linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
740of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
741the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
742linker script containing:
743
744@smallexample
745 foo = 1
746 foo = foo * 4
747 foo = foo + 8
748@end smallexample
749
750will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
751option is used:
752
753@smallexample
754 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
755 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
757@end smallexample
758
759See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
760scripts.
252b5132
RH
761@end itemize
762
763@kindex -n
764@cindex read-only text
765@cindex NMAGIC
766@kindex --nmagic
767@item -n
768@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
769Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
770libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
771mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
772
773@kindex -N
774@kindex --omagic
775@cindex read/write from cmd line
776@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 777@item -N
252b5132
RH
778@itemx --omagic
779Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
780not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
781libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
782mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
783is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
784specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
785
786@kindex --no-omagic
787@cindex OMAGIC
788@item --no-omagic
789This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
790sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
791be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
792shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
793
794@kindex -o @var{output}
795@kindex --output=@var{output}
796@cindex naming the output file
797@item -o @var{output}
798@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 799Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
800option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
801script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
802
803@kindex -O @var{level}
804@cindex generating optimized output
805@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 806If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 807the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
808should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
809option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
810the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
811no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
812of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 813
387dd777
DP
814@kindex -plugin @var{name}
815@item -plugin @var{name}
816Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
817the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
818automatically added by the complier, when using link time
819optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
820wish.
821
822Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
823from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
824@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
825those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
826copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
827based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 828just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 829
26278bb8
UD
830@kindex --push-state
831@cindex push state governing input file handling
832@item --push-state
833The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
834flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
835restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
836
837The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
838@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
839@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
840@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
841@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
842@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
843
844One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
845used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
846listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
847something as follows:
848
849@smallexample
850-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
851@end smallexample
852
853@kindex --pop-state
854@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 855@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
a70f34c0
NC
929@kindex --strip-discarded
930@kindex --no-strip-discarded
931@item --strip-discarded
932@itemx --no-strip-discarded
933Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
934Enabled by default.
935
252b5132
RH
936@kindex -t
937@kindex --trace
938@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 939@item -t
252b5132 940@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 941Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
942
943@kindex -T @var{script}
944@kindex --script=@var{script}
945@cindex script files
946@item -T @var{scriptfile}
947@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
948Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 949@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 950@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
951output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
952the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
953specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
954options accumulate.
252b5132 955
14be8564
L
956@kindex -dT @var{script}
957@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
958@cindex script files
959@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
960@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
961Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
962
963This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
964processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
965command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
966@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
967behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
968command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
969the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
970@samp{gcc}).
971
252b5132
RH
972@kindex -u @var{symbol}
973@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
974@cindex undefined symbol
975@item -u @var{symbol}
976@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
977Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
978symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
979modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
980different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
981option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
982
0a618243
AB
983If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
984into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
985undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
986instead.
987
988@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
989@cindex symbols, require defined
990@cindex defined symbol
991@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
992Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
993is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
994is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
995and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
996@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
997can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
998
252b5132
RH
999@kindex -Ur
1000@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1001@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1002For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1003@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1004turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1005@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1006It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1007with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1008be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1009@samp{-r} for the others.
1010
c005eb9e
AB
1011@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1012@cindex orphan sections
1013@cindex sections, orphan
1014@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1015Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1016specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1017
1018@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1019
1020@table @code
1021@item place
1022Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1023the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1024@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1025
1026@item discard
1027All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1028@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1029
1030@item warn
1031The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1032issue a warning.
1033
1034@item error
1035The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1036@end table
1037
1038The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1039
577a0623
AM
1040@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1041@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1043@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1044missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1045specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1046multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1047input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1048in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1049
252b5132
RH
1050@kindex -v
1051@kindex -V
1052@kindex --version
1053@cindex version
1054@item -v
1055@itemx --version
1056@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1057Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1058lists the supported emulations.
1059
1060@kindex -x
1061@kindex --discard-all
1062@cindex deleting local symbols
1063@item -x
1064@itemx --discard-all
1065Delete all local symbols.
1066
1067@kindex -X
1068@kindex --discard-locals
1069@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1070@item -X
252b5132 1071@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1072Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1073system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1074or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1075
1076@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1077@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1078@cindex symbol tracing
1079@item -y @var{symbol}
1080@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1081Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1082option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1083to prepend an underscore.
1084
1085This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1086don't know where the reference is coming from.
1087
1088@kindex -Y @var{path}
1089@item -Y @var{path}
1090Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1091for Solaris compatibility.
1092
1093@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1094@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1095The recognized keywords are:
1096@table @samp
1097
e6e2dfbd
AM
1098@item bndplt
1099Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1100
1101@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1102@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1103@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1104@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1105Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1106to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1107@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1108@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1109@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1110@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1111Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1112
cd6d6c15 1113@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1114@itemx nocombreloc
1115Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1116dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1117
b8871f35 1118@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1119@itemx nocommon
1120Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1121link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1122
1123@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1124Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1125layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1126using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1127
cd6d6c15 1128@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1129Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1130is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1131This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1132
e6e2dfbd
AM
1133@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1134@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1135Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1136if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1137by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1138@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1139may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1140selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1141these options.
1142
6aa29e7b
JJ
1143@item execstack
1144Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1145
b039ef04
L
1146@item global
1147This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1148the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1149of subsequently loaded libraries.
1150
93ab9c0d
NC
1151@item globalaudit
1152This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1153This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1154setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1155tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1156the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
6c19b93b 1157all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1158
e6e2dfbd
AM
1159@item ibtplt
1160Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1161Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1162
8df93cb5 1163@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1164Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1165to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1166Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1167
cd6d6c15
NC
1168@item initfirst
1169This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1170It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1171before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1172the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1173the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1174objects.
1175
1176@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1177Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1178so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1179libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1180
5fa222e4
AM
1181@item lazy
1182When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1183dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1184the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1185Lazy binding is the default.
1186
cd6d6c15 1187@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1188Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1189
e6e2dfbd
AM
1190@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1191Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1192
e6e2dfbd
AM
1193@item muldefs
1194Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1195
cd6d6c15 1196@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1197Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1198defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1199
1200@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1201Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1202should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1203
1204@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1205Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1206
1207@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1208Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1209
1210@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1211Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1212
6aa29e7b
JJ
1213@item noexecstack
1214Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1215
e6e2dfbd
AM
1216@item noextern-protected-data
1217Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1218library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1219used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1220generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1221module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1222i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1223
e6e2dfbd
AM
1224@item noreloc-overflow
1225Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1226relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1227overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1228
cd6d6c15
NC
1229@item now
1230When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1231dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1232when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1233function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1234called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1235
1236@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1237Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1238
6aa29e7b 1239@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1240@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1241Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1242specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1243relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1244than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1245Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1246
47acac12
L
1247@item separate-code
1248@itemx noseparate-code
1249Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1250specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1251be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1252code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1253
e6e2dfbd
AM
1254@item shstk
1255Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1256to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1257Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1258
04c3a755 1259@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1260Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1261Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1262@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1263
e6e2dfbd
AM
1264@item text
1265@itemx notext
1266@itemx textoff
1267Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1268relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1269@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1270
97a232d7
NC
1271@item undefs
1272Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1273either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1274This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1275
cd6d6c15
NC
1276@end table
1277
ece2d90e 1278Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1279
1280@kindex -(
1281@cindex groups of archives
1282@item -( @var{archives} -)
1283@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1284The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1285either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1286
1287The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1288references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1289the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1290archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1291object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1292would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1293they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1294resolved.
1295
1296Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1297it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1298more archives.
1299
69da35b5
NC
1300@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1301@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1302@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1303@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1304Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1305recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1306and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1307the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1308behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1309so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1310restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1311
4a43e768
AM
1312@kindex --as-needed
1313@kindex --no-as-needed
1314@item --as-needed
1315@itemx --no-as-needed
1316This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1317on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1318the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1319on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1320needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1321emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1322non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1323the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1324non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1325Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1326the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1327needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1328from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1329
e56f61be
L
1330@kindex --add-needed
1331@kindex --no-add-needed
1332@item --add-needed
1333@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1334These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1335their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1336options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1337and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1338
252b5132
RH
1339@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1340@item -assert @var{keyword}
1341This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1342
1343@kindex -Bdynamic
1344@kindex -dy
1345@kindex -call_shared
1346@item -Bdynamic
1347@itemx -dy
1348@itemx -call_shared
1349Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1350for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1351default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1352for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1353multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1354@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1355
a1ab1d2a
UD
1356@kindex -Bgroup
1357@item -Bgroup
1358Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1359section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1360object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1361@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1362only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1363
252b5132
RH
1364@kindex -Bstatic
1365@kindex -dn
1366@kindex -non_shared
1367@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1368@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1369@itemx -dn
1370@itemx -non_shared
1371@itemx -static
1372Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1373platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1374variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1375may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1376library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1377option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1378option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1379shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1380references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1381libraries.
252b5132
RH
1382
1383@kindex -Bsymbolic
1384@item -Bsymbolic
1385When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1386definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1387for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1388within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1389@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1390executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1391the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1392support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1393
40b36307
L
1394@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1395@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1396When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1397symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1398This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1399when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1400to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1401This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1402libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1403
55255dae
L
1404@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1405@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1407typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1408global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1409within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1410to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1411in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1412which support shared libraries.
1413
1414The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1415scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1416
40b36307
L
1417@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1418@item --dynamic-list-data
1419Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1420
1421@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1422@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1424is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1425
0b8a70d9
L
1426@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1427@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1429
252b5132
RH
1430@kindex --check-sections
1431@kindex --no-check-sections
1432@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1433@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1434Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1435been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1436perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1437suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1438allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1439restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1440Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1441force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1442option.
252b5132 1443
ddbb8a31
NC
1444@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1445@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1446@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1447@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1448This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1449by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1450command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1451output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1452input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1453specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1454follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1455behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1456
1457This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1458libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1459mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1460their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1461required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1462the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1463dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1464symbols.
1465
252b5132
RH
1466@cindex cross reference table
1467@kindex --cref
1468@item --cref
1469Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1470generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1471Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1472
1473The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1474easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1475sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1476symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1477definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1478where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1479symbol are listed.
252b5132 1480
4818e05f
AM
1481@cindex common allocation
1482@kindex --no-define-common
1483@item --no-define-common
1484This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1485The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1486@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1487
1488The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1489the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1490of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1491forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1492Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1493from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1494This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1495and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1496duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1497paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1498
7bdf4127
AB
1499@cindex group allocation in linker script
1500@cindex section groups
1501@cindex COMDAT
1502@kindex --force-group-allocation
1503@item --force-group-allocation
1504This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1505normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1506default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1507change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1508command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1509effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1510
252b5132 1511@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1512@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1513@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1514Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1515address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1516times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1517limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1518context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1519symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1520constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1521using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1522@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1523equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1524
1525@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1526@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1527@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1528@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1529@itemx --no-demangle
1530These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1531and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1532present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1533underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1534mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1535different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1536to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1537demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1538is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1539
1540@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1541@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1542@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1543@item -I@var{file}
1544@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1545Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1546generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1547linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1548doing.
1549
9b8b325a
RF
1550@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1551@item --no-dynamic-linker
1552When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1553linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1554executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1555entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1556
a70f34c0
NC
1557@kindex --embedded-relocs
1558@item --embedded-relocs
1559This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1560that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1561is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1562targets.
1563
7ce691ae 1564@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1565@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1566@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1567@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1568Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1569with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1570
252b5132
RH
1571@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1572@item --force-exe-suffix
1573Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1574
1575If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1576@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1577the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1578option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1579Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1580it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1581
1582@kindex --gc-sections
1583@kindex --no-gc-sections
1584@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1585@item --gc-sections
1586@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1587Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1588targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1589performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1590@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1591collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1592implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1593
d5465ba2
AM
1594@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1595examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1596symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1597command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1598referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1599libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1600referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1601the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1602relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1603
ac69cbc6 1604This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1605@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1606specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1607a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1608
c17d87de
NC
1609@kindex --print-gc-sections
1610@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1611@cindex garbage collection
1612@item --print-gc-sections
1613@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1614List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1615printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1616collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1617default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1618be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1619line.
1620
22185505 1621@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1622@cindex garbage collection
1623@item --gc-keep-exported
1624When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1625collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1626default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1627executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1628collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1629Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1630it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1631ELF format targets.
1632
30824704
RM
1633@kindex --print-output-format
1634@cindex output format
1635@item --print-output-format
1636Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1637other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1638in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1639
3604cb1f
TG
1640@kindex --print-memory-usage
1641@cindex memory usage
1642@item --print-memory-usage
1643Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1644the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1645quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1646headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1647parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1648
1649@smallexample
1650Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1651 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1652 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1653@end smallexample
1654
252b5132
RH
1655@cindex help
1656@cindex usage
1657@kindex --help
1658@item --help
1659Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1660
ea20a7da
CC
1661@kindex --target-help
1662@item --target-help
1663Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1664
2509a395
SL
1665@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1666@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1667Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1668@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1669
1670@cindex memory usage
1671@kindex --no-keep-memory
1672@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1673@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1674symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1675instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1676necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1677while linking a large executable.
1678
1679@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1680@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1681@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1682@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1683@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1684Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1685is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1686The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1687behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1688libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1689
97a232d7
NC
1690The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1691
aa713662
L
1692@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1693@kindex -z muldefs
1694@item --allow-multiple-definition
1695@itemx -z muldefs
1696Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1697report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1698first definition will be used.
1699
b79e8c78 1700@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1701@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1702@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1703@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1704Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1705This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1706determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1707shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1708how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1709
903249d7
NC
1710The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1711referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1712an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1713a shared library.
1714
1715The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1716libraries specified at link time are that:
1717
1718@itemize @bullet
1719@item
1720A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1721that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1722resolvable at load time.
1723@item
1724There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1725symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1726
1727The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1728select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1729architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1730appropriate memset function.
1731@end itemize
b79e8c78 1732
31941635
L
1733@kindex --no-undefined-version
1734@item --no-undefined-version
1735Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1736it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1737will be issued instead.
1738
3e3b46e5
PB
1739@kindex --default-symver
1740@item --default-symver
1741Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1742exported symbols.
1743
1744@kindex --default-imported-symver
1745@item --default-imported-symver
1746Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1747imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1748
252b5132
RH
1749@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1750@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1751Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1752files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1753been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1754This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1755errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1756have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1757inappropriate.
1758
fe7929ce
AM
1759@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1760@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1761Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1762library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1763
252b5132
RH
1764@kindex --no-whole-archive
1765@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1766Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1767archive files.
1768
1769@cindex output file after errors
1770@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1771@item --noinhibit-exec
1772Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1773Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1774errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1775when it issues any error whatsoever.
1776
0a9c1c8e
CD
1777@kindex -nostdlib
1778@item -nostdlib
1779Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1780command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1781(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1782
252b5132 1783@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1784@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1785@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1786@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1787file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1788@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1789object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1790object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1791should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1792usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1793name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1794list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1795command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1796this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1797@end ifclear
1798
76359541
TP
1799@kindex --out-implib
1800@item --out-implib @var{file}
1801Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1802the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1803library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1804may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1805behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1806step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1807the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1808
36af4a4e
JJ
1809@kindex -pie
1810@kindex --pic-executable
1811@item -pie
1812@itemx --pic-executable
1813@cindex position independent executables
1814Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1815ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1816libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1817address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1818normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1819defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1820
252b5132
RH
1821@kindex -qmagic
1822@item -qmagic
1823This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1824
1825@kindex -Qy
1826@item -Qy
1827This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1828
1829@kindex --relax
1830@cindex synthesizing linker
1831@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1832@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1833@item --relax
28d5f677 1834@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1835An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1836@ifset GENERIC
1837This option is only supported on a few targets.
1838@end ifset
1839@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1840@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1841@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1842@ifset XTENSA
1843@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1844@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1845@ifset M68HC11
1846@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1847@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1848@ifset NIOSII
1849@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1850@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1851@ifset POWERPC
1852@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1853@end ifset
252b5132 1854
28d5f677
NC
1855On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1856global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1857addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1858synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1859instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1860
1861On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1862debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1863@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1864This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1865family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1866@end ifset
1867
1868@ifset GENERIC
1869On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1870but ignored.
1871@end ifset
1872
28d5f677
NC
1873On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1874@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1875
252b5132
RH
1876@cindex retaining specified symbols
1877@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1878@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1879@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1880@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1881Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1882discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1883symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1884@ifset GENERIC
1885(such as VxWorks)
1886@end ifset
1887where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1888run-time memory.
1889
1890@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1891or symbols needed for relocations.
1892
1893You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1894line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1895
1896@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1897@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1898@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1899@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1900Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1901linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1902arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1903them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1904also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1905objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1906@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1907ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1908@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1909
ff5dcc92 1910The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1911SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1912@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1913runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1914options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1915gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1916file systems.
252b5132 1917
ff5dcc92 1918For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1919followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1920the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1921@end ifset
1922
1923@ifset GENERIC
1924@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1925@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1926@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1927When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1928happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1929of the input files.
1930
1931When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1932non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1933shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1934explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1935specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1936@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1937either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1938appearing multiple times.
1939
e680a6b6
NC
1940The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1941directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1942containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1943and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
194464-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1945
1946The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1947@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1948supported.
1949
28c309a2
NC
1950This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1951that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1952is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1953runtime linker would do.
1954
252b5132 1955The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1956libraries:
252b5132
RH
1957@enumerate
1958@item
ff5dcc92 1959Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1960@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1961Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1962between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1963specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1964used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1965at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1966by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1967the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1968@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1969On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1970@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1971environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1972@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1973On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1974directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1975@item
a1b8d843 1976For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1977variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1978@item
ec4eb78a
L
1979For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1980@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1981libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1982@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1983@item
252b5132
RH
1984The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1985@item
1986For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1987exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1988@end enumerate
1989
1990If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1991warning and continue with the link.
1992@end ifset
1993
1994@kindex -shared
1995@kindex -Bshareable
1996@item -shared
1997@itemx -Bshareable
1998@cindex shared libraries
1999Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2000and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2001shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2002undefined symbols in the link.
2003
252b5132 2004@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2005@item --sort-common
2006@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2007@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2008This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2009ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2010sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2011eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2012between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2013specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2014
2509a395
SL
2015@kindex --sort-section=name
2016@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2017This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2018patterns in the linker script.
2019
2509a395
SL
2020@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2021@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2022This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2023patterns in the linker script.
2024
a70f34c0
NC
2025@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2026@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2027This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2028.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2029post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2030
252b5132 2031@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2032@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2033Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2034each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2035size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2036
2037@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2038@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2039Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2040output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2041This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2042certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2043cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2044that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2045support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2046input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2047more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2048many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2049
2050@kindex --stats
2051@item --stats
2052Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2053as execution time and memory usage.
2054
2509a395 2055@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2056@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2057Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2058configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2059that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2060
a70f34c0
NC
2061@kindex --task-link
2062@item --task-link
2063This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2064file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2065
252b5132
RH
2066@kindex --traditional-format
2067@cindex traditional format
2068@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2069For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2070the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2071use the traditional format instead.
2072
2073@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2074For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2075symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2076full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2077@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2078trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2079combine duplicate entries.
2080
2509a395
SL
2081@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2082@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2083Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2084address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2085times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2086line.
2087@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2088for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2089@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2090should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2091sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2092
2509a395
SL
2093@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2094@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2095@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2096@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2097@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2098@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2099@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2100Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2101@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2102
2509a395
SL
2103@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2104@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2105@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2106When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2107byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2108
9d5777a3
RM
2109@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2110@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2111@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2112When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2113the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2114text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2115
0d705e9f
AM
2116@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2117@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2118@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2119When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2120model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2121
560e09e9
NC
2122@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2123@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2124Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2125values for @samp{method}:
2126
2127@table @samp
2128@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2129Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2130
2131@item report-all
da8bce14 2132Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2133
2134@item ignore-in-object-files
2135Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2136ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2137
2138@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2139Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2140ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2141when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2142libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2143command line.
2144@end table
2145
2146The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2147by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2148
2149Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2150unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2151can change this to a warning.
2152
1715a13c
L
2153@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2154@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2155@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2156@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2157Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2158supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2159the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2160argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2161
2162@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2163@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2164@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2165Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2166used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2167about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2168is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2169see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2170use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2171symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2172@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2173
7ce691ae 2174@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2175@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2176@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2177@item --warn-common
2178Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2179a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2180but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2181you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2182Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2183warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2184
2185There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2186
2187@table @samp
2188@item int i = 1;
2189A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2190file.
2191
2192@item extern int i;
2193An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2194There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2195variable somewhere.
2196
2197@item int i;
2198A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2199variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2200The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2201single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2202size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2203a definition of the same variable.
2204@end table
2205
2206The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2207Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2208just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2209encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2210a common symbol.
2211
2212@enumerate
2213@item
2214Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2215definition for the symbol.
2216@smallexample
2217@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2218 overridden by definition
2219@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2220@end smallexample
2221
2222@item
2223Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2224the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2225except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2226@smallexample
2227@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2228 overriding common
2229@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2230@end smallexample
2231
2232@item
2233Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2234@smallexample
2235@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2236 of `@var{symbol}'
2237@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2238@end smallexample
2239
2240@item
2241Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2242@smallexample
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2244 overridden by larger common
2245@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2246@end smallexample
2247
2248@item
2249Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2250the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2251encountered in a different order.
2252@smallexample
2253@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2254 overriding smaller common
2255@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2256@end smallexample
2257@end enumerate
2258
2259@kindex --warn-constructors
2260@item --warn-constructors
2261Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2262object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2263detect the use of global constructors.
2264
2265@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2266@item --warn-multiple-gp
2267Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2268This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2269Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2270section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2271of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2272base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2273base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2274bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2275large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2276values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2277option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2278
2279@kindex --warn-once
2280@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2281@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2282@item --warn-once
2283Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2284which refers to it.
2285
2286@kindex --warn-section-align
2287@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2288@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2289@item --warn-section-align
2290Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2291alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2292The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2293is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2294the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2295
8fdd7217
NC
2296@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2297@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2298Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2299
a0c402a5
L
2300@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2301@item --warn-alternate-em
2302Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2303
560e09e9
NC
2304@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2305@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2306If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2307@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2308This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2309
2310@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2311@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2312This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2313it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2314
252b5132
RH
2315@kindex --whole-archive
2316@cindex including an entire archive
2317@item --whole-archive
2318For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2319@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2320in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2321files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2322library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2323library. This option may be used more than once.
2324
7ec229ce 2325Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2326about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2327Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2328list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2329your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2330
2509a395
SL
2331@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2332@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2333Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2334@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2335undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2336@var{symbol}.
2337
2338This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2339wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2340wishes to call the system function, it should call
2341@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2342
2343Here is a trivial example:
2344
2345@smallexample
2346void *
cc2f008e 2347__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2348@{
cc2f008e 2349 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2350 return __real_malloc (c);
2351@}
2352@end smallexample
2353
ff5dcc92 2354If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2355all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2356instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2357call the real @code{malloc} function.
2358
2359You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2360links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2361you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2362file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2363call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2364
6aa29e7b 2365@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2366@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2367@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2368@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2369Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2370(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2371section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2372
e41b3a13
JJ
2373@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2374@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2375Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2376generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2377if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2378
6c1439be
L
2379@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2380@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2381@item --enable-new-dtags
2382@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2383This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2384systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2385@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2386and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2387If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2388created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2389those options are only available for ELF systems.
2390
2d643429 2391@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2392@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2393Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2394close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2395time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2396increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2397value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2398
fdc90cb4
JJ
2399@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2400@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2401Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2402@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2403new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2404the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2405hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2406
0ce398f1
L
2407@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2408@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2409@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2410@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2411@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2412@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2413@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2414@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2415On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2416compressed using zlib.
2417
2418@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2419sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2420DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2421instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2422also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2423sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2424
2425The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2426@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2427
2428Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2429sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2430for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2431uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2432
2433The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2434involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2435default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2436@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2437
35835446
JR
2438@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2439@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2440This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2441linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2442for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2443about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2444
4f9c04f7 2445Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24461021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2447run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2448has been used.
2449
2450The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2451enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2452
c0065db7
RM
2453@kindex --build-id
2454@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2455@item --build-id
2456@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2457Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2458or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2459unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2460@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2461@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2462@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2463the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2464string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2465@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2466is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2467
2468The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2469that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2470unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2471to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2472file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2473string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2474
2475Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2476@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2477@end table
2478
0285c67d
NC
2479@c man end
2480
36f63dca 2481@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2482
0285c67d
NC
2483@c man begin OPTIONS
2484
ff5dcc92 2485The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2486the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2487normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2488use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2489@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2490like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2491symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2492object file).
2493
2494In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2495support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2496PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2497values by either a space or an equals sign.
2498
ff5dcc92 2499@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2500
2501@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2502@item --add-stdcall-alias
2503If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2504as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2505[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2506
2507@kindex --base-file
2508@item --base-file @var{file}
2509Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2510addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2511@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2512[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2513
2514@kindex --dll
2515@item --dll
2516Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2517@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2518file.
bb10df36 2519[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2520
88183869
DK
2521@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2522@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2523@item --enable-long-section-names
2524@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2525The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2526the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2527for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2528fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2529to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2530allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2531disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2532generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2533as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2534with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2535GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2536information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2537option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2538section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2539when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2540image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2541[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2542
252b5132
RH
2543@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2544@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2545@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2546@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2547If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2548do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2549only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2550resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2551undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2552@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2553to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2554warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2555import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2556to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2557feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2558@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2559mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2560[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2561
522f09cd
KT
2562@kindex --leading-underscore
2563@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2564@item --leading-underscore
2565@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2566For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2567in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2568disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2569
252b5132
RH
2570@cindex DLLs, creating
2571@kindex --export-all-symbols
2572@item --export-all-symbols
2573If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2574be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2575otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2576explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2577attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2578option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2579@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2580@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2581exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2582re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2583such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2584@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2585@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2586Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2587not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2588extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2589(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2590These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2591@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2592@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2593@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2594@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2595[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2596
2597@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2598@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2599Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2600exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2601[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2602
2927aaca
NC
2603@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2604@item --exclude-all-symbols
2605Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2606[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2607
252b5132
RH
2608@kindex --file-alignment
2609@item --file-alignment
2610Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2611file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2612512.
bb10df36 2613[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2614
2615@cindex heap size
2616@kindex --heap
2617@item --heap @var{reserve}
2618@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2619Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2620to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2621committed.
bb10df36 2622[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2623
2624@cindex image base
2625@kindex --image-base
2626@item --image-base @var{value}
2627Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2628the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2629is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2630your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2631other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2632for dlls.
bb10df36 2633[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2634
2635@kindex --kill-at
2636@item --kill-at
2637If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2638symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2639[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2640
26d2d8a2
BF
2641@kindex --large-address-aware
2642@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2643If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2644header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2645greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2646or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2647section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2648[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2649
f69a2f97
NC
2650@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2651@item --disable-large-address-aware
2652Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2653This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2654driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2655addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2656[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2657
252b5132
RH
2658@kindex --major-image-version
2659@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2660Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2661[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2662
2663@kindex --major-os-version
2664@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2665Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2666[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2667
2668@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2669@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2670Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2671[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2672
2673@kindex --minor-image-version
2674@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2675Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2676[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2677
2678@kindex --minor-os-version
2679@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2680Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2681[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2682
2683@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2684@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2685Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2686[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2687
2688@cindex DEF files, creating
2689@cindex DLLs, creating
2690@kindex --output-def
2691@item --output-def @var{file}
2692The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2693file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2694(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2695library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2696automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2697[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2698
b044cda1 2699@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2700@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2701@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2702@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2703Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2704@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2705By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2706for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2707execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2708[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2709
2710@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2711@item --disable-auto-image-base
2712Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2713user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2714default.
bb10df36 2715[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2716
2717@cindex DLLs, linking to
2718@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2719@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2720When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2721search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2722@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2723between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2724uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2725@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2726[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2727
2728@kindex --enable-auto-import
2729@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2730Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2731DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2732mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2733[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2734
2735The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2736feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2737
2738Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2739of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2740PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2741
e2a83dd0
NC
2742Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2743data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2744placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2745around a problem with consts that is described here:
2746http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2747
4d8907ac
DS
2748Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2749see this message:
0d888aac 2750
ece2d90e 2751"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2752documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2753
ece2d90e
NC
2754This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2755ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2756allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2757fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2758constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2759multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2760this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2761of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2762the warning, and exit.
2763
2764There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2765data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2766
2fa9fc65
NC
2767One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2768of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2769this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2770
c0065db7
RM
2771A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2772that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2773there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2774a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2775
2776@example
2777extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2778extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2779 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2780@end example
2781
2782or
2783
2784@example
2785extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2786extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2787 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2788@end example
2789
c0065db7 2790For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2791is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2792
2793@example
2794extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2795extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2796 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2797@end example
2798
c406afaf
NC
2799or
2800
2801@example
2802extern long long extern_ll;
2803extern_ll -->
2804 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2805@end example
2806
2fa9fc65 2807A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2808'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2809@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2810requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2811building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2812merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2813between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2814constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2815
2816Original:
2817@example
2818--foo.h
2819extern int arr[];
2820--foo.c
2821#include "foo.h"
2822void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2823 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2824@}
2825@end example
2826
2827Solution 1:
2828@example
2829--foo.h
2830extern int arr[];
2831--foo.c
2832#include "foo.h"
2833void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2834 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2835 volatile int *parr = arr;
2836 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2837@}
2838@end example
2839
2840Solution 2:
2841@example
2842--foo.h
2843/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2844#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2845 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2846#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2847#else
2848#define FOO_IMPORT
2849#endif
2850extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2851--foo.c
2852#include "foo.h"
2853void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2854 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2855@}
2856@end example
2857
c0065db7 2858A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2859library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2860for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2861functions).
b044cda1
CW
2862
2863@kindex --disable-auto-import
2864@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2865Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2866@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2867[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2868
2fa9fc65
NC
2869@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2870@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2871If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2872that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2873a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2874environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2875[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2876
2877@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2878@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2879Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2880[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2881
b044cda1
CW
2882@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2883@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2884Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2885[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2886
252b5132
RH
2887@kindex --section-alignment
2888@item --section-alignment
2889Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2890addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2891[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2892
2893@cindex stack size
2894@kindex --stack
2895@item --stack @var{reserve}
2896@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2897Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2898to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2899committed.
bb10df36 2900[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2901
2902@kindex --subsystem
2903@item --subsystem @var{which}
2904@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2905@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2906Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2907legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2908@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2909the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2910@var{which}.
bb10df36 2911[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2912
2f563b51
DK
2913The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2914of the PE file header:
2915[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2916
2d5c3743
NC
2917@kindex --high-entropy-va
2918@item --high-entropy-va
2919Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2920(ASLR).
2921
2f563b51
DK
2922@kindex --dynamicbase
2923@item --dynamicbase
2924The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2925randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2926Vista for i386 PE targets.
2927
2928@kindex --forceinteg
2929@item --forceinteg
2930Code integrity checks are enforced.
2931
2932@kindex --nxcompat
2933@item --nxcompat
2934The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2935This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2936
2937@kindex --no-isolation
2938@item --no-isolation
2939Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2940
2941@kindex --no-seh
2942@item --no-seh
2943The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2944this image.
2945
2946@kindex --no-bind
2947@item --no-bind
2948Do not bind this image.
2949
2950@kindex --wdmdriver
2951@item --wdmdriver
2952The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2953
2f563b51
DK
2954@kindex --tsaware
2955@item --tsaware
2956The image is Terminal Server aware.
2957
0cb112f7
CF
2958@kindex --insert-timestamp
2959@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2960@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2961Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2962as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2963other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2964will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2965same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2966can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2967that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2968identically.
252b5132
RH
2969@end table
2970
0285c67d
NC
2971@c man end
2972
ac145307
BS
2973@ifset C6X
2974@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2975
2976@c man begin OPTIONS
2977
2978The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2979libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2980all executables use an index of 0.
2981
2982@table @gcctabopt
2983
2984@kindex --dsbt-size
2985@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2986This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2987or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2988entries.
2989
2990@kindex --dsbt-index
2991@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2992This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2993to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2994executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2995@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2996
fbd9ad90
PB
2997@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2998The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2999exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3000
ac145307
BS
3001@end table
3002
3003@c man end
3004@end ifset
3005
93fd0973
SC
3006@ifset M68HC11
3007@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3008
3009@c man begin OPTIONS
3010
3011The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3012memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3013
3014@table @gcctabopt
3015
3016@kindex --no-trampoline
3017@item --no-trampoline
3018This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3019is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3020instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3021
3022@kindex --bank-window
3023@item --bank-window @var{name}
3024This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3025the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3026The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3027paging and addresses within the memory window.
3028
3029@end table
3030
3031@c man end
3032@end ifset
3033
7fb9f789
NC
3034@ifset M68K
3035@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3036
3037@c man begin OPTIONS
3038
3039The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3040when linking for 68K targets.
3041
3042@table @gcctabopt
3043
3044@kindex --got
3045@item --got=@var{type}
3046This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3047@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3048@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3049Info entry for @file{ld}.
3050
3051@end table
3052
3053@c man end
3054@end ifset
3055
833794fc
MR
3056@ifset MIPS
3057@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3058
3059@c man begin OPTIONS
3060
3061The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3062generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3063linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3064
3065@table @gcctabopt
3066
3067@kindex --insn32
3068@item --insn32
3069@kindex --no-insn32
3070@itemx --no-insn32
3071These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3072generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3073or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
307432-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3075used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3076possible.
3077
8b10b0b3
MR
3078@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3079@item --ignore-branch-isa
3080@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3081@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3082These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3083transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3084accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3085is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3086instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3087equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3088calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3089a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3090an error.
3091
833794fc
MR
3092@end table
3093
3094@c man end
3095@end ifset
3096
252b5132
RH
3097@ifset UsesEnvVars
3098@node Environment
3099@section Environment Variables
3100
0285c67d
NC
3101@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3102
560e09e9 3103You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3104@ifclear SingleFormat
3105@code{GNUTARGET},
3106@end ifclear
3107@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3108
36f63dca 3109@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3110@kindex GNUTARGET
3111@cindex default input format
3112@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3113use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3114of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3115@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3116of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3117attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3118this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3119there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3120object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3121BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3122in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3123@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3124
3125@kindex LDEMULATION
3126@cindex default emulation
3127@cindex emulation, default
3128@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3129@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3130behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3131available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3132the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3133variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3134linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3135
3136@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3137@cindex demangling, default
3138Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3139@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3140default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3141a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3142may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3143options.
3144
0285c67d
NC
3145@c man end
3146@end ifset
3147
252b5132
RH
3148@node Scripts
3149@chapter Linker Scripts
3150
3151@cindex scripts
3152@cindex linker scripts
3153@cindex command files
3154Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3155written in the linker command language.
3156
3157The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3158the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3159the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3160more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3161direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3162described below.
3163
3164The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3165yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3166linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3167to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3168such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3169
3170You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3171line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3172default linker script.
3173
3174You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3175to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3176Linker Scripts}.
3177
3178@menu
3179* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3180* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3181* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3182* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3183* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3184* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3185* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3186* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3187* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3188* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3189* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3190@end menu
3191
3192@node Basic Script Concepts
3193@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3194@cindex linker script concepts
3195We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3196describe the linker script language.
3197
3198The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3199file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3200@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3201The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3202purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3203among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3204section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3205in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3206
3207Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3208also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3209contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3210the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3211A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3212area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3213loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3214which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3215of debugging information.
3216
3217Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3218first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3219the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3220@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3221section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3222same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3223is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3224(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3225based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3226RAM address would be the VMA.
3227
3228You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3229program with the @samp{-h} option.
3230
3231Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3232@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3233has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3234information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3235will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3236static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3237referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3238
3239You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3240program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3241option.
3242
3243@node Script Format
3244@section Linker Script Format
3245@cindex linker script format
3246Linker scripts are text files.
3247
3248You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3249either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3250symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3251generally ignored.
3252
3253Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3254If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3255otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3256double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3257file name.
3258
3259You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3260@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3261to whitespace.
3262
3263@node Simple Example
3264@section Simple Linker Script Example
3265@cindex linker script example
3266@cindex example of linker script
3267Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3268
3269The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3270@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3271memory layout of the output file.
3272
3273The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3274describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3275code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3276@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3277Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3278your input files.
3279
3280For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32810x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3282linker script which will do that:
3283@smallexample
3284SECTIONS
3285@{
3286 . = 0x10000;
3287 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3288 . = 0x8000000;
3289 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3290 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3291@}
3292@end smallexample
3293
3294You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3295followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3296descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3297
252b5132
RH
3298The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3299sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3300counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3301other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3302current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3303incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3304@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3305
3306The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3307required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3308after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3309which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3310wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3311means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3312
3313Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3314@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3315@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3316
3317The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3318the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3319at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3320output section, the value of the location counter will be
3321@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3322effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3323immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3324
3325The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3326alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3327example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3328sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3329may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3330sections.
3331
3332That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3333
3334@node Simple Commands
3335@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3336@cindex linker script simple commands
3337In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3338
3339@menu
3340* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3341* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3342@ifclear SingleFormat
3343* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3344@end ifclear
3345
4a93e180 3346* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3347* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3348@end menu
3349
3350@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3351@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3352@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3353@cindex start of execution
3354@cindex first instruction
3355@cindex entry point
3356The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3357point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3358entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3359@smallexample
3360ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3361@end smallexample
3362
3363There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3364entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3365stopping when one of them succeeds:
3366@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3367@item
252b5132 3368the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3369@item
252b5132 3370the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3371@item
3ab904c4
NC
3372the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3373targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3374check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3375@item
252b5132 3376the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3377@item
252b5132
RH
3378The address @code{0}.
3379@end itemize
3380
3381@node File Commands
36f63dca 3382@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3383@cindex linker script file commands
3384Several linker script commands deal with files.
3385
3386@table @code
3387@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3388@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3389@cindex including a linker script
3390Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3391be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3392with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
339310 levels deep.
3394
4006703d
NS
3395You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3396@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3397
252b5132
RH
3398@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3399@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3400@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3401@cindex input files in linker scripts
3402@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3403@cindex linker script input object files
3404The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3405in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3406
3407For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3408a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3409then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3410
3411In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3412script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3413
e3f2db7f
AO
3414In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3415with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3416located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3417for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3418open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3419linker will search through the archive library search path.
3420The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3421as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3422path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3423@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3424
ff5dcc92 3425If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3426name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3427@samp{-l}.
3428
3429When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3430files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3431script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3432
3433@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3434@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3435@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3436@cindex grouping input files
3437The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3438files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3439new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3440in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3441
b717d30e
JJ
3442@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3443@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3444@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3445This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3446commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3447as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3448with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3449when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3450@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3451and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3452setting afterwards.
3453
252b5132
RH
3454@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3455@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3456@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3457The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3458@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3459@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3460Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3461precedence.
3462
3463You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3464output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3465
3466@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3467@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3468@cindex library search path in linker script
3469@cindex archive search path in linker script
3470@cindex search path in linker script
3471The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3472@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3473@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3474on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3475are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3476the command line option are searched first.
3477
3478@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3479@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3480@cindex first input file
3481The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3482that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3483though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3484when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3485first file.
3486@end table
3487
3488@ifclear SingleFormat
3489@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3490@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3491A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3492
3493@table @code
3494@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3495@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3496@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3497@cindex output file format in linker script
3498The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3499output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3500exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3501(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3502line option takes precedence.
3503
3504You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3505formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3506This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3507desired endianness.
3508
3509If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3510will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3511output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3512used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3513
3514For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3515command:
3516@smallexample
3517OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3518@end smallexample
3519This says that the default format for the output file is
3520@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3521option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3522format.
3523
3524@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3525@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3526@cindex input file format in linker script
3527The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3528files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3529This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3530(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3531is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3532command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3533@end table
3534@end ifclear
3535
4a93e180
NC
3536@node REGION_ALIAS
3537@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3538@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3539@cindex region alias
3540@cindex region names
3541
3542Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3543@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3544
3545@smallexample
3546REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3547@end smallexample
3548
3549The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3550memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3551to memory regions. An example follows.
3552
3553Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3554memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3555that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3556non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3557access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3558read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3559sections:
3560
3561@itemize @bullet
3562@item
3563@code{.text} program code;
3564@item
3565@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3566@item
3567@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3568@item
3569@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3570@end itemize
3571
3572The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3573part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3574output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3575systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3576@code{C}:
3577@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3578@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3579@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3580@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3581@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3582@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3583@end multitable
3584The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3585loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3586the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3587the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3588
3589The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3590includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3591memory layout:
3592@smallexample
3593INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3594
3595SECTIONS
3596 @{
3597 .text :
3598 @{
3599 *(.text)
3600 @} > REGION_TEXT
3601 .rodata :
3602 @{
3603 *(.rodata)
3604 rodata_end = .;
3605 @} > REGION_RODATA
3606 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3607 @{
3608 data_start = .;
3609 *(.data)
3610 @} > REGION_DATA
3611 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3612 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3613 .bss :
3614 @{
3615 *(.bss)
3616 @} > REGION_BSS
3617 @}
3618@end smallexample
3619
3620Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3621regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3622variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3623@table @code
3624@item A
3625Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3626@smallexample
3627MEMORY
3628 @{
3629 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3630 @}
3631
3632REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3633REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3634REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3635REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3636@end smallexample
3637@item B
3638Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3639into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3640@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3641@smallexample
3642MEMORY
3643 @{
3644 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3645 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3646 @}
3647
3648REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3649REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3650REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3651REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3652@end smallexample
3653@item C
3654Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3655@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3656initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3657system start into the @code{RAM}.
3658@smallexample
3659MEMORY
3660 @{
3661 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3662 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3663 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3664 @}
3665
3666REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3667REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3668REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3669REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3670@end smallexample
3671@end table
3672
3673It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3674@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3675necessary:
3676@smallexample
3677#include <string.h>
3678
3679extern char data_start [];
3680extern char data_size [];
3681extern char data_load_start [];
3682
3683void copy_data(void)
3684@{
3685 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3686 @{
3687 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3688 @}
3689@}
3690@end smallexample
3691
252b5132 3692@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3693@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3694There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3695
3696@table @code
3697@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3698@kindex ASSERT
3699@cindex assertion in linker script
3700Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3701with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3702
fd1c4238
NC
3703Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3704take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3705inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3706for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3707symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3708
3709@smallexample
3710 .stack :
3711 @{
3712 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3713 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3714 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3715 @}
3716@end smallexample
3717
3718will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3719PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3720can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3721
3722@smallexample
3723 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3724 .stack :
3725 @{
3726 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3727 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3728 @}
3729@end smallexample
3730
3731will work.
3732
252b5132
RH
3733@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3734@kindex EXTERN
3735@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3736Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3737symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3738modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3739each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3740command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3741
3742@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3743@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3744@cindex common allocation in linker script
3745This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3746to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3747output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3748
4818e05f
AM
3749@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3750@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3751@cindex common allocation in linker script
3752This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3753command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3754to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3755
7bdf4127
AB
3756@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3757@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3758@cindex group allocation in linker script
3759@cindex section groups
3760@cindex COMDAT
3761This command has the same effect as the
3762@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3763@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3764and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3765specified (@samp{-r}).
3766
53d25da6
AM
3767@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3768@kindex INSERT
3769@cindex insert user script into default script
3770This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3771augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3772inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3773@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3774default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3775sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3776linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3777insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3778linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3779default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3780of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3781to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3782is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3783
3784@smallexample
3785SECTIONS
3786@{
3787 OVERLAY :
3788 @{
3789 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3790 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3791 @}
3792@}
3793INSERT AFTER .text;
3794@end smallexample
3795
252b5132
RH
3796@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3797@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3798@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3799This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3800references among certain output sections.
3801
3802In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3803using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3804will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3805errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3806a function defined in the other section.
3807
3808The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3809@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3810an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3811@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3812names.
3813
cdf96953
MF
3814@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3815@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3816@cindex cross references
3817This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3818references to one section from a list of other sections.
3819
3820The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3821output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3822a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3823there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3824must never call back.
3825
3826The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3827The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3828If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3829the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3830status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3831names, not input section names.
3832
252b5132
RH
3833@ifclear SingleFormat
3834@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3835@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3836@cindex machine architecture
3837@cindex architecture
3838Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3839of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3840architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3841the @samp{-f} option.
3842@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3843
3844@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3845@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3846This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3847@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3848in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3849@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3850@end table
3851
3852@node Assignments
3853@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3854@cindex assignment in scripts
3855@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3856@cindex variables, defining
3857You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3858the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3859
3860@menu
3861* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3862* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3863* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3864* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3865* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3866@end menu
3867
3868@node Simple Assignments
3869@subsection Simple Assignments
3870
3871You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3872
3873@table @code
3874@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3875@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3876@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3877@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3878@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3879@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3880@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3881@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3882@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3883@end table
3884
3885The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3886@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3887defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3888
3889The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3890may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3891
3892The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3893
3894Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3895
3896You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3897statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3898section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3899
3900The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3901expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3902
3903Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3904assignments may be used:
3905
3906@smallexample
3907floating_point = 0;
3908SECTIONS
3909@{
3910 .text :
3911 @{
3912 *(.text)
3913 _etext = .;
3914 @}
156e34dd 3915 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3916 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3917@}
3918@end smallexample
3919@noindent
3920In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3921zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3922the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3923defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3924upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3925
eb8476a6
MR
3926@node HIDDEN
3927@subsection HIDDEN
3928@cindex HIDDEN
3929For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3930exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3931
3932Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3933@code{HIDDEN}:
3934
3935@smallexample
3936HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3937SECTIONS
3938@{
3939 .text :
3940 @{
3941 *(.text)
3942 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3943 @}
3944 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3945 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3946@}
3947@end smallexample
3948@noindent
3949In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3950
252b5132
RH
3951@node PROVIDE
3952@subsection PROVIDE
3953@cindex PROVIDE
3954In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3955only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3956the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3957@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3958@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3959@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3960@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3961@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3962
3963Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3964@smallexample
3965SECTIONS
3966@{
3967 .text :
3968 @{
3969 *(.text)
3970 _etext = .;
3971 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3972 @}
3973@}
3974@end smallexample
3975
3976In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3977underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3978the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3979underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3980If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3981linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3982
b0daac83
NC
3983Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
3984defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
3985that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
3986when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
3987@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
3988
7af8e998
L
3989@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3990@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3991@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3992Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3993hidden and won't be exported.
3994
73ae6183
NC
3995@node Source Code Reference
3996@subsection Source Code Reference
3997
3998Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3999intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4000a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4001symbol that does not have a value.
4002
4003Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4004transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4005stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4006prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4007mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4008of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4009variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4010linker script variable might be referred to as:
4011
4012@smallexample
4013 extern int foo;
4014@end smallexample
4015
4016But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4017
4018@smallexample
4019 _foo = 1000;
4020@end smallexample
4021
4022In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4023transformation has taken place.
4024
4025When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4026things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4027in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4028second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4029table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4030contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4031value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4032
4033@smallexample
4034 int foo = 1000;
4035@end smallexample
4036
10bf6894 4037creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4038holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4039number 1000 is initially stored.
4040
4041When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4042first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4043memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4044So:
4045
4046@smallexample
4047 foo = 1;
4048@end smallexample
4049
4050looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4051associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4052address. Whereas:
4053
4054@smallexample
4055 int * a = & foo;
4056@end smallexample
4057
10bf6894 4058looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4059and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4060the variable @samp{a}.
4061
4062Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4063the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4064an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4065
4066@smallexample
4067 foo = 1000;
4068@end smallexample
4069
4070creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4071the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4072address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4073linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4074access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4075
4076Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4077you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4078use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4079section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4080linker script contains these declarations:
4081
4082@smallexample
4083@group
4084 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4085 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4086 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4087@end group
4088@end smallexample
4089
4090Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4091
4092@smallexample
4093@group
4094 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4095
73ae6183
NC
4096 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4097@end group
4098@end smallexample
4099
4100Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4101Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4102arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4103
4104@smallexample
4105@group
4106 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4107
4108 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4109@end group
4110@end smallexample
4111
4112Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4113operators.
73ae6183 4114
252b5132 4115@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4116@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4117@kindex SECTIONS
4118The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4119into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4120
4121The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4122@smallexample
4123SECTIONS
4124@{
4125 @var{sections-command}
4126 @var{sections-command}
4127 @dots{}
4128@}
4129@end smallexample
4130
4131Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4132
4133@itemize @bullet
4134@item
4135an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4136@item
4137a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4138@item
4139an output section description
4140@item
4141an overlay description
4142@end itemize
4143
4144The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4145@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4146those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4147understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4148the layout of the output file.
4149
4150Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4151below.
4152
4153If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4154linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4155section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4156input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4157example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4158in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4159
4160@menu
4161* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4162* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4163* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4164* Input Section:: Input section description
4165* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4166* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4167* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4168* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4169* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4170@end menu
4171
4172@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4173@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4174The full description of an output section looks like this:
4175@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4176@group
7e7d5768 4177@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4178 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4179 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4180 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4181 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4182 @{
4183 @var{output-section-command}
4184 @var{output-section-command}
4185 @dots{}
abc9061b 4186 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4187@end group
4188@end smallexample
4189
4190Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4191
4192The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4193name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4194The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4195the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4196The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4197
4198Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4199
4200@itemize @bullet
4201@item
4202a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4203@item
4204an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4205@item
4206data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4207@item
4208a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4209@end itemize
4210
4211@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4212@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4213@cindex name, section
4214@cindex section name
4215The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4216meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4217support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4218must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4219example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4220output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4221names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4222quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4223characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4224commas must be quoted.
4225
4226The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4227Discarding}.
4228
4229@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4230@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4231@cindex address, section
4232@cindex section address
4233The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4234address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4235is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4236
4237If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4238section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4239to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4240alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4241contained within the output section.
4242
4243The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4244
4245@itemize @bullet
4246@item
4247If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4248is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4249in that region.
4250
4251@item
4252If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4253regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4254section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4255be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4256
4257@item
4258If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4259the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4260counter.
4261@end itemize
4262
4263@noindent
4264For example:
4265
252b5132
RH
4266@smallexample
4267.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4268@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4269
252b5132
RH
4270@noindent
4271and
ea5cae92 4272
252b5132
RH
4273@smallexample
4274.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4275@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4276
252b5132
RH
4277@noindent
4278are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4279@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4280counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4281counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4282input sections.
252b5132
RH
4283
4284The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4285For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4286so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4287do something like this:
4288@smallexample
4289.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4290@end smallexample
4291@noindent
4292This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4293aligned upward to the specified value.
4294
4295Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4296location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4297sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4298
4299@node Input Section
36f63dca 4300@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4301@cindex input sections
4302@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4303The most common output section command is an input section description.
4304
4305The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4306You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4307in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4308map the input files into your memory layout.
4309
4310@menu
4311* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4312* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4313* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4314* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4315* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4316@end menu
4317
4318@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4319@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4320@cindex input section basics
4321An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4322by a list of section names in parentheses.
4323
4324The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4325describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4326
4327The most common input section description is to include all input
4328sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4329include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4330@smallexample
4331*(.text)
4332@end smallexample
4333@noindent
18625d54 4334Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4335@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4336of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4337match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4338example:
252b5132 4339@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4340EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4341@end smallexample
4342@noindent
4343will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4344and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4345placed inside the section list, for example:
4346@smallexample
b4346c09 4347*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4348@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4349@noindent
4350The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4351two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4352more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4353
4354There are two ways to include more than one section:
4355@smallexample
4356*(.text .rdata)
4357*(.text) *(.rdata)
4358@end smallexample
4359@noindent
4360The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4361@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4362first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4363they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4364@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4365@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4366
8f1732fc
AB
4367When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4368is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4369immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4370@smallexample
4371*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4372@end smallexample
4373@noindent
4374will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4375@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4376from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4377exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4378could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4379@smallexample
4380*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4381@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4382@noindent
4383Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4384before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4385all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4386@smallexample
4387EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4388@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4389
252b5132
RH
4390You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4391You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4392needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4393@smallexample
4394data.o(.data)
4395@end smallexample
4396
ae17ab41
CM
4397To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4398of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4399
4400Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4401
4402@smallexample
4403@group
4404SECTIONS @{
4405 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4406 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4407@}
4408@end group
4409@end smallexample
4410
4411In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4412input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4413@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4414@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4415whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4416
967928e9
AM
4417You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4418matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4419with no whitespace around the colon.
4420
4421@table @samp
4422@item archive:file
4423matches file within archive
4424@item archive:
4425matches the whole archive
4426@item :file
4427matches file but not one in an archive
4428@end table
4429
4430Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4431wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4432single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4433@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4434within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4435also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4436other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4437from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4438command.
4439
252b5132
RH
4440If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4441the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4442commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4443@smallexample
4444data.o
4445@end smallexample
4446
967928e9
AM
4447When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4448and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4449characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4450name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4451did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4452though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4453@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4454the archive search path.
4455
4456@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4457@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4458@cindex input section wildcards
4459@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4460@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4461@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4462In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4463name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4464
4465The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4466pattern for the file name.
4467
4468The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4469
4470@table @samp
4471@item *
4472matches any number of characters
4473@item ?
4474matches any single character
4475@item [@var{chars}]
4476matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4477character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4478@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4479@item \
4480quotes the following character
4481@end table
4482
4483When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4484will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4485Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4486exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4487@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4488a @samp{/} character.
4489
4490File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4491specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4492does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4493
4494If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4495appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4496will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4497sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4498@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4499@smallexample
4500.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4501.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4502@end smallexample
4503
bcaa7b3e 4504@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4505Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4506in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4507this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4508pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4509@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4510into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4511
bcaa7b3e
L
4512@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4513@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4514difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4515descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4516Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4517reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4518
02ecc8e9
L
4519@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4520@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4521difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4522ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4523encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4524
bcaa7b3e
L
4525@cindex SORT
4526@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4527
4528When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4529can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4530
4531@enumerate
4532@item
4533@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4534It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4535sections have the same name.
4536@item
4537@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4538It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4539sections have the same alignment.
4540@item
c0065db7 4541@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4542treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4543@item
4544@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4545is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4546@item
4547All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4548@end enumerate
4549
4550When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4551section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4552takes precedence over the command line option.
4553
4554If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4555command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4556treated as nested sorting command.
4557
4558@enumerate
4559@item
4560@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4561@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4562@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4563@item
4564@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4565@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4566@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4567@end enumerate
4568
4569If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4570command line option will be ignored.
4571
eda680f8
L
4572@cindex SORT_NONE
4573@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4574section sorting option.
4575
252b5132
RH
4576If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4577@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4578precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4579
4580This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4581files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4582sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4583The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4584with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4585linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4586@smallexample
4587@group
4588SECTIONS @{
4589 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4590 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4591 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4592 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4593@}
4594@end group
4595@end smallexample
4596
4597@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4598@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4599@cindex common symbol placement
4600@cindex uninitialized data placement
4601A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4602file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4603linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4604named @samp{COMMON}.
4605
4606You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4607other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4608particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4609input files are placed in another section.
4610
4611In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4612@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4613@smallexample
4614.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4615@end smallexample
4616
4617@cindex scommon section
4618@cindex small common symbols
4619Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4620example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4621symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4622different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4623the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4624symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4625to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4626locations.
4627
4628@cindex [COMMON]
4629You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4630notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4631@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4632
4633@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4634@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4635@cindex KEEP
4636@cindex garbage collection
4637When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4638it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4639This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4640with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4641@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4642
4643@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4644@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4645The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4646to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4647start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4648@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4649follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4650@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4651@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4652All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4653files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4654
4655@smallexample
4656@group
4657SECTIONS @{
4658 outputa 0x10000 :
4659 @{
4660 all.o
4661 foo.o (.input1)
4662 @}
36f63dca
NC
4663@end group
4664@group
252b5132
RH
4665 outputb :
4666 @{
4667 foo.o (.input2)
4668 foo1.o (.input1)
4669 @}
36f63dca
NC
4670@end group
4671@group
252b5132
RH
4672 outputc :
4673 @{
4674 *(.input1)
4675 *(.input2)
4676 @}
4677@}
4678@end group
a1ab1d2a 4679@end smallexample
252b5132 4680
cbd0eecf
L
4681If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4682and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4683automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4684__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4685indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4686respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4687C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4688
252b5132 4689@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4690@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4691@cindex data
4692@cindex section data
4693@cindex output section data
4694@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4695@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4696@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4697@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4698@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4699You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4700@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4701an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4702parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4703value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4704counter.
4705
4706The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4707store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4708bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4709stored.
4710
4711For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4712of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4713@smallexample
4714BYTE(1)
4715LONG(addr)
4716@end smallexample
4717
4718When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4719same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4720target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4721@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4722@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4723
4724If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4725which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4726When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4727true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4728endianness of the first input object file.
4729
36f63dca 4730Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4731between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4732@smallexample
4733SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4734@end smallexample
4735whereas this will work:
4736@smallexample
4737SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4738@end smallexample
4739
252b5132
RH
4740@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4741@cindex holes, filling
4742@cindex unspecified memory
4743You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4744current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4745otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4746gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4747with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4748necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4749point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4750than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4751different parts of an output section.
4752
4753This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4754value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4755@smallexample
563e308f 4756FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4757@end smallexample
4758
4759The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4760section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4761part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4762entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4763precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4764expression.
252b5132
RH
4765
4766@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4767@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4768There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4769commands.
4770
4771@table @code
4772@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4773@cindex input filename symbols
4774@cindex filename symbols
4775@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4776The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4777The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4778file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4779the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4780
4781This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4782normally used for any other object file format.
4783
4784@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4785@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4786@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4787@item CONSTRUCTORS
4788When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4789unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4790destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4791arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4792automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4793For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4794linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4795@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4796ignored for other object file formats.
4797
4798The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4799constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4800Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4801the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4802first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4803of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4804compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4805formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4806@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4807the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4808destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4809@code{exit}.
4810
4811For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4812arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4813addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4814and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4815linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4816runtime code expects to see.
4817
4818@smallexample
4819 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4820 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4821 *(.ctors)
4822 LONG(0)
4823 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4824 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4825 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4826 *(.dtors)
4827 LONG(0)
4828 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4829@end smallexample
4830
4831If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4832which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4833are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4834are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4835command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4836@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4837@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4838@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4839
4840Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4841and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4842need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4843scripts.
4844
4845@end table
4846
4847@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4848@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4849@cindex discarding sections
4850@cindex sections, discarding
4851@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4852The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4853This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4854may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4855@smallexample
49c13adb 4856.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4857@end smallexample
4858@noindent
4859will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4860@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4861sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4862space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4863too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4864space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4865@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4866@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4867This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4868
a0976ea4 4869The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4870on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4871symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4872the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4873section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4874
4875@cindex /DISCARD/
4876The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4877input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4878section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4879
4880@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4881@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4882@cindex output section attributes
4883We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4884like this:
0c71d759 4885
252b5132 4886@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4887@group
7e7d5768 4888@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4889 [AT(@var{lma})]
4890 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4891 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4892 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4893 @{
4894 @var{output-section-command}
4895 @var{output-section-command}
4896 @dots{}
562d3460 4897 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4898@end group
4899@end smallexample
0c71d759 4900
252b5132
RH
4901We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4902@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4903remaining section attributes.
4904
a1ab1d2a 4905@menu
252b5132
RH
4906* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4907* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4908* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4909* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4910* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4911* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4912* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4913* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4914@end menu
4915
4916@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4917@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4918Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4919parentheses. The following types are defined:
4920
4921@table @code
4922@item NOLOAD
4923The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4924loaded into memory when the program is run.
4925@item DSECT
4926@itemx COPY
4927@itemx INFO
4928@itemx OVERLAY
4929These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4930rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4931marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4932section when the program is run.
4933@end table
4934
4935@kindex NOLOAD
4936@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4937@cindex loading, preventing
4938The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4939the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4940the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4941@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4942need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4943@smallexample
4944@group
4945SECTIONS @{
4946 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4947 @dots{}
4948@}
4949@end group
4950@end smallexample
4951
4952@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4953@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4954@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4955@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4956@cindex load address
4957@cindex section load address
4958Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4959@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4960@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4961specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4962address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4963
ea5cae92
NC
4964The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4965specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4966takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4967load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4968region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4969
4970If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4971section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4972load address:
4973
4974@itemize @bullet
4975@item
4976If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4977the LMA address as well.
4978
4979@item
4980If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4981
4982@item
4983Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4984with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4985section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4986VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4987the last section in the located region.
4988
4989@item
4990If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4991that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4992
4993@item
4994If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4995section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4996@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4997
4998@cindex ROM initialized data
4999@cindex initialized data in ROM
5000This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5001example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5002called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5003@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5004even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5005uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5006defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5007counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5008
5009@smallexample
5010@group
5011SECTIONS
5012 @{
5013 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5014 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5015 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5016 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5017 .bss 0x3000 :
5018 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5019@}
5020@end group
5021@end smallexample
5022
5023The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5024this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5025the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5026how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5027script.
5028
5029@smallexample
5030@group
5031extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5032char *src = &_etext;
5033char *dst = &_data;
5034
ea5cae92
NC
5035/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5036while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5037 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5038
ea5cae92 5039/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5040for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5041 *dst = 0;
5042@end group
5043@end smallexample
5044
bbf115d3
L
5045@node Forced Output Alignment
5046@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5047@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5048@cindex forcing output section alignment
5049@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5050You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5051alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5052intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5053
7e7d5768
AM
5054@node Forced Input Alignment
5055@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5056@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5057@cindex forcing input section alignment
5058@cindex input section alignment
5059You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5060SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5061sections, whether larger or smaller.
5062
0c71d759
NC
5063@node Output Section Constraint
5064@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5065@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5066@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5067@cindex constraints on output sections
5068You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5069of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5070read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5071@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5072
252b5132 5073@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5074@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5075@kindex >@var{region}
5076@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5077@cindex memory regions and sections
5078You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5079using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5080
5081Here is a simple example:
5082@smallexample
5083@group
5084MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5085SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5086@end group
5087@end smallexample
5088
5089@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5090@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5091@kindex :@var{phdr}
5092@cindex section, assigning to program header
5093@cindex program headers and sections
5094You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5095using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5096one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5097assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5098@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5099linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5100
5101Here is a simple example:
5102@smallexample
5103@group
5104PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5105SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5106@end group
5107@end smallexample
5108
5109@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5110@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5111@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5112@cindex section fill pattern
5113@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5114You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5115@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5116(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5117within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5118alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5119necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5120of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5121an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5122fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5123other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5124pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5125expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5126
5127You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5128output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5129
5130Here is a simple example:
5131@smallexample
5132@group
563e308f 5133SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5134@end group
5135@end smallexample
5136
5137@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5138@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5139@kindex OVERLAY
5140@cindex overlays
5141An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5142are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5143the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5144copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5145required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5146can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5147than another.
5148
5149Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5150@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5151output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5152command is as follows:
5153@smallexample
5154@group
5155OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5156 @{
5157 @var{secname1}
5158 @{
5159 @var{output-section-command}
5160 @var{output-section-command}
5161 @dots{}
5162 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5163 @var{secname2}
5164 @{
5165 @var{output-section-command}
5166 @var{output-section-command}
5167 @dots{}
5168 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5169 @dots{}
abc9061b 5170 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5171@end group
5172@end smallexample
5173
5174Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5175section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5176section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5177those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5178except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5179sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5180
abc9061b
CC
5181The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5182the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5183
252b5132
RH
5184The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5185addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5186memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5187whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5188and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5189and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5190
56dd11f0
NC
5191If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5192references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5193the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5194sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5195@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5196
5197For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5198provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5199defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5200@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5201the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5202within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5203symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5204
5205At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5206the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5207
5208Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5209@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5210@smallexample
5211@group
5212 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5213 @{
5214 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5215 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5216 @}
5217@end group
5218@end smallexample
5219@noindent
5220This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5221address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5222@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5223following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5224@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5225@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5226
5227C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5228like the following.
5229
5230@smallexample
5231@group
5232 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5233 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5234 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5235@end group
5236@end smallexample
5237
5238Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5239everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5240example could have been written identically as follows.
5241
5242@smallexample
5243@group
5244 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5245 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5246 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5247 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5248 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5249 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5250 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5251@end group
5252@end smallexample
5253
5254@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5255@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5256@kindex MEMORY
5257@cindex memory regions
5258@cindex regions of memory
5259@cindex allocating memory
5260@cindex discontinuous memory
5261The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5262memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5263
5264The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5265memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5266may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5267can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5268set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5269regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5270around to fit into the available regions.
5271
127fcdff
AB
5272A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5273however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5274specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5275@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5276@smallexample
5277@group
a1ab1d2a 5278MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5279 @{
5280 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5281 @dots{}
5282 @}
5283@end group
5284@end smallexample
5285
5286The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5287region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5288Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5289with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5290must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5291add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5292command.
252b5132
RH
5293
5294@cindex memory region attributes
5295The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5296whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5297not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5298@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5299section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5300the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5301them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5302
5303The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5304@table @samp
5305@item R
5306Read-only section
5307@item W
5308Read/write section
5309@item X
5310Executable section
5311@item A
5312Allocatable section
5313@item I
5314Initialized section
5315@item L
5316Same as @samp{I}
5317@item !
c09e9a8c 5318Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5319@end table
5320
5321If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5322@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5323attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5324in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5325attributes.
5326
5327@kindex ORIGIN =
5328@kindex o =
5329@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5330The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5331the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5332cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5333abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5334@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5335
5336@kindex LENGTH =
5337@kindex len =
5338@kindex l =
5339The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5340region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5341be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5342@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5343
5344In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5345available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5346and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5347linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5348is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5349or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5350explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5351region.
5352
5353@smallexample
5354@group
a1ab1d2a 5355MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5356 @{
5357 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5358 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5359 @}
5360@end group
5361@end smallexample
5362
5363Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5364specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5365@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5366a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5367output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5368was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5369the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5370output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5371region, the linker will issue an error message.
5372
3ec57632 5373It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5374expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5375@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5376
5377@smallexample
5378@group
c0065db7 5379 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5380@end group
5381@end smallexample
5382
252b5132
RH
5383@node PHDRS
5384@section PHDRS Command
5385@kindex PHDRS
5386@cindex program headers
5387@cindex ELF program headers
5388@cindex program segments
5389@cindex segments, ELF
5390The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5391@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5392loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5393program with the @samp{-p} option.
5394
5395When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5396reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5397program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5398This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5399interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5400
5401The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5402in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5403precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5404the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5405not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5406
5407The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5408generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5409ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5410
5411This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5412@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5413
5414@smallexample
5415@group
5416PHDRS
5417@{
5418 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5419 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5420@}
5421@end group
5422@end smallexample
5423
5424The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5425of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5426header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5427with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5428must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5429is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5430
5431Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5432system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5433specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5434sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5435attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5436Section Phdr}.
5437
5438It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5439merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5440repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5441contain the section.
5442
5443If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5444then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5445not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5446convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5447placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5448default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5449segment at all.
5450
5451@kindex FILEHDR
5452@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5453You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5454the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5455The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5456file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5457include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5458segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5459these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5460
5461The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5462value of the keyword.
5463
5464@table @asis
5465@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5466Indicates an unused program header.
5467
5468@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5469Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5470the file.
5471
5472@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5473Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5474
5475@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5476Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5477found.
5478
5479@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5480Indicates a segment holding note information.
5481
5482@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5483A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5484ABI.
5485
5486@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5487Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5488
1a9ccd70
NC
5489@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5490Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5491
252b5132
RH
5492@item @var{expression}
5493An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5494be used for types not defined above.
5495@end table
5496
5497You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5498in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5499@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5500Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5501output section attribute.
5502
5503The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5504which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5505explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5506an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5507header.
5508
5509Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5510headers used on a native ELF system.
5511
5512@example
5513@group
5514PHDRS
5515@{
5516 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5517 interp PT_INTERP ;
5518 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5519 data PT_LOAD ;
5520 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5521@}
5522
5523SECTIONS
5524@{
5525 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5526 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5527 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5528 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5529 @dots{}
5530 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5531 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5532 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5533 @dots{}
5534@}
5535@end group
5536@end example
5537
5538@node VERSION
5539@section VERSION Command
5540@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5541@cindex symbol versions
5542@cindex version script
5543@cindex versions of symbols
5544The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5545only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5546symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5547a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5548shared library.
5549
5550You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5551you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5552also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5553
5554The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5555@smallexample
5556VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5557@end smallexample
5558
5559The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5560Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5561version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5562version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5563version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5564scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5565library.
5566
5567The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5568examples.
5569
5570@smallexample
5571VERS_1.1 @{
5572 global:
5573 foo1;
5574 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5575 old*;
5576 original*;
5577 new*;
252b5132
RH
5578@};
5579
5580VERS_1.2 @{
5581 foo2;
5582@} VERS_1.1;
5583
5584VERS_2.0 @{
5585 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5586 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5587 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5588 "f(int, double)";
5589 @};
252b5132
RH
5590@} VERS_1.2;
5591@end smallexample
5592
5593This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5594version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5595The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5596a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5597of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5598symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5599is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5600in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5601However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5602name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5603
5604Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5605depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5606to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5607
5608Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5609depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5610and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5611
5612When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5613specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5614unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5615unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5616somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5617wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5618wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5619set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5620ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5621
5622The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5623they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5624could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5625However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5626
0f6bf451 5627Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5628in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5629symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5630won't.
5631
5632@smallexample
7c9c73be 5633@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5634@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5635
252b5132
RH
5636When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5637symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5638requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5639shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5640loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5641linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5642application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5643way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5644all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5645search for each symbol reference.
5646
5647The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5648doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5649that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5650functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5651the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5652required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5653that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5654versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5655the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5656
5657There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5658first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5659source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5660script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5661maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5662@smallexample
5663__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5664@end smallexample
5665@noindent
5666in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5667be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5668The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5669@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5670takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5671
5672The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5673function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5674an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5675version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5676linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5677
5678To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5679source file. Here is an example:
5680
5681@smallexample
5682__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5683__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5684__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5685__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5686@end smallexample
5687
5688In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5689unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5690example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5691@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5692
5693When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5694some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5695this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5696@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5697declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5698you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5699
5700If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5701within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5702(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5703specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5704
cb840a31
L
5705You can also specify the language in the version script:
5706
5707@smallexample
5708VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5709@end smallexample
5710
c0065db7 5711The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5712The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5713demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5714patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5715@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5716
86043bbb
MM
5717Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5718described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5719or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5720the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5721whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5722cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5723might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5724should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5725expect when you upgrade.
5726
252b5132
RH
5727@node Expressions
5728@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5729@cindex expressions
5730@cindex arithmetic
5731The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5732that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5733expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5734host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5735
5736You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5737
5738The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5739expressions.
5740
5741@menu
5742* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5743* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5744* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5745* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5746* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5747* Operators:: Operators
5748* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5749* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5750* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5751@end menu
5752
5753@node Constants
5754@subsection Constants
5755@cindex integer notation
5756@cindex constants in linker scripts
5757All constants are integers.
5758
5759As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5760octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5761hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5762@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5763@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5764value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5765
5766@cindex scaled integers
5767@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5768@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5769@cindex suffixes for integers
5770@cindex integer suffixes
5771In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5772constant by
5773@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5774@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5775@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5776@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5777@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5778@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5779@tex
5780${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5781@end tex
5782@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5783respectively. For example, the following
5784all refer to the same quantity:
5785
252b5132 5786@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5787_fourk_1 = 4K;
5788_fourk_2 = 4096;
5789_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5790_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5791@end smallexample
5792
8a308ae8
NC
5793Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5794conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5795
0c71d759
NC
5796@node Symbolic Constants
5797@subsection Symbolic Constants
5798@cindex symbolic constants
5799@kindex CONSTANT
5800It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5801the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5802
5803@table @code
5804@item MAXPAGESIZE
5805@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5806The target's maximum page size.
5807
5808@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5809@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5810The target's default page size.
5811@end table
5812
5813So for example:
5814
5815@smallexample
9d5777a3 5816 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5817@end smallexample
5818
5819will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5820supported by the target.
5821
252b5132
RH
5822@node Symbols
5823@subsection Symbol Names
5824@cindex symbol names
5825@cindex names
5826@cindex quoted symbol names
5827@kindex "
5828Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5829and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5830Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5831specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5832keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5833@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5834"SECTION" = 9;
5835"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5836@end smallexample
5837
5838Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5839to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5840whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5841
ecca9871
L
5842@node Orphan Sections
5843@subsection Orphan Sections
5844@cindex orphan
5845Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5846are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5847script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5848output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5849in which to place the orphaned input section.
5850
5851If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5852an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5853placed at the end of that output section.
5854
5855If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5856sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5857name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5858orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5859one new output section.
5860
5861If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5862then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5863in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5864linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5865attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5866sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5867support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5868
c005eb9e
AB
5869The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5870(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5871output sections an orphan is placed in.
5872
252b5132
RH
5873@node Location Counter
5874@subsection The Location Counter
5875@kindex .
5876@cindex dot
5877@cindex location counter
5878@cindex current output location
5879The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5880current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5881location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5882within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5883anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5884
5885@cindex holes
5886Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5887moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5888location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5889and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5890doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5891
5892@smallexample
5893SECTIONS
5894@{
5895 output :
5896 @{
5897 file1(.text)
5898 . = . + 1000;
5899 file2(.text)
5900 . += 1000;
5901 file3(.text)
563e308f 5902 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5903@}
5904@end smallexample
5905@noindent
5906In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5907located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5908followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5909@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5910@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5911specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5912
5c6bbab8
NC
5913@cindex dot inside sections
5914Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5915current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5916statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5917absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5918however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5919not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5920
5921@smallexample
5922SECTIONS
5923@{
5924 . = 0x100
5925 .text: @{
5926 *(.text)
5927 . = 0x200
5928 @}
5929 . = 0x500
5930 .data: @{
5931 *(.data)
5932 . += 0x600
5933 @}
5934@}
5935@end smallexample
5936
5937The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5938and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5939the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5940much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5941move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5942and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5943the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5944the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5945
b5666f2f
AM
5946@cindex dot outside sections
5947Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5948output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5949needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5950
5951@smallexample
5952SECTIONS
5953@{
5954 start_of_text = . ;
5955 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5956 end_of_text = . ;
5957
5958 start_of_data = . ;
5959 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5960 end_of_data = . ;
5961@}
5962@end smallexample
5963
5964If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5965not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5966between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5967should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5968blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5969the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5970sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5971statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5972special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5973place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5974as follows:
5975
5976@smallexample
5977SECTIONS
5978@{
5979 start_of_text = . ;
5980 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5981 end_of_text = . ;
5982
5983 start_of_data = . ;
5984 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5985 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5986 end_of_data = . ;
5987@}
5988@end smallexample
5989
5990This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5991@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5992placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5993assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5994a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5995section. So you could write:
5996
5997@smallexample
5998SECTIONS
5999@{
6000 start_of_text = . ;
6001 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6002 end_of_text = . ;
6003
6004 . = . ;
6005 start_of_data = . ;
6006 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6007 end_of_data = . ;
6008@}
6009@end smallexample
6010
6011Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6012@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6013
252b5132
RH
6014@need 2000
6015@node Operators
6016@subsection Operators
6017@cindex operators for arithmetic
6018@cindex arithmetic operators
6019@cindex precedence in expressions
6020The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6021the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6022@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6023@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6024@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6025@smallexample
6026precedence associativity Operators Notes
6027(highest)
60281 left ! - ~ (1)
60292 left * / %
60303 left + -
60314 left >> <<
60325 left == != > < <= >=
60336 left &
60347 left |
60358 left &&
60369 left ||
603710 right ? :
603811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6039(lowest)
6040@end smallexample
6041Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6042(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6043(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6044@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6045@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6046@tex
6047\vskip \baselineskip
6048%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6049\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6050\hrule
6051\halign
6052{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6053height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6054&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6055height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6056\noalign{\hrule}
6057height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6058&highest&&&&&\cr
6059% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6060&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6061&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6062&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6063&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6064&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6065&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6066&7&&left&&|&\cr
6067&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6068&9&&left&&||&\cr
6069&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6070&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6071&lowest&&&&&\cr
6072height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6073\hrule}
6074@end tex
6075@iftex
6076{
6077@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6078@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6079@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6080}
6081@end iftex
6082@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6083
6084@node Evaluation
6085@subsection Evaluation
6086@cindex lazy evaluation
6087@cindex expression evaluation order
6088The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6089an expression when absolutely necessary.
6090
6091The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6092address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6093regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6094as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6095
6096However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6097until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6098other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6099for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6100
6101The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6102assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6103allocation.
6104
6105Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6106@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6107
6108If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6109available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6110following
6111@smallexample
6112@group
6113SECTIONS
6114 @{
a1ab1d2a 6115 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6116 @{ *(.text) @}
6117 @}
6118@end group
6119@end smallexample
6120@noindent
6121will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6122address}.
6123
6124@node Expression Section
6125@subsection The Section of an Expression
6126@cindex expression sections
6127@cindex absolute expressions
6128@cindex relative expressions
6129@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6130@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6131@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6132Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6133relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6134using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6135value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6136symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6137operations.
6138
abf4be64
AM
6139Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6140section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6141address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6142@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6143functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6144One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6145(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6146differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6147versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6148section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6149Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6150absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6151given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6152everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6153
6154In the following simple example,
252b5132 6155
7542af2a
AM
6156@smallexample
6157@group
6158SECTIONS
6159 @{
6160 . = 0x100;
6161 __executable_start = 0x100;
6162 .data :
6163 @{
6164 . = 0x10;
6165 __data_start = 0x10;
6166 *(.data)
6167 @}
6168 @dots{}
6169 @}
6170@end group
6171@end smallexample
252b5132 6172
7542af2a
AM
6173both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6174address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6175@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6176section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6177
5c3049d2
AM
6178For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6179addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6180
6181@itemize @bullet
6182@item
c05f749e
AM
6183Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6184operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6185absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6186@item
7542af2a
AM
6187Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6188relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6189and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6190@item
c05f749e
AM
6191Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6192in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6193address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6194before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6195@end itemize
6196
6197The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6198
6199@itemize @bullet
6200@item
6201An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6202@item
6203The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6204@item
9bc8bb33 6205The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6206relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6207(after above conversions) is also a number when
6208@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6209but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6210@item
6211The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6212relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6213section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6214@item
6215The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6216conversions) is an absolute address.
6217@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6218
6219You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6220to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6221create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6222section @samp{.data}:
6223@smallexample
6224SECTIONS
6225 @{
6226 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6227 @}
6228@end smallexample
6229@noindent
6230If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6231@samp{.data} section.
6232
7542af2a
AM
6233Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6234particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6235
252b5132
RH
6236@node Builtin Functions
6237@subsection Builtin Functions
6238@cindex functions in expressions
6239The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6240use in linker script expressions.
6241
6242@table @code
6243@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6244@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6245@cindex expression, absolute
6246Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6247of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6248value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6249normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6250
6251@item ADDR(@var{section})
6252@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6253@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6254Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6255script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6256the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6257@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6258@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6259the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6260@smallexample
6261@group
6262SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6263 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6264 @{
252b5132
RH
6265 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6266 @dots{}
6267 @}
6268 .output :
6269 @{
6270 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6271 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6272 @}
6273@dots{} @}
6274@end group
6275@end smallexample
6276
876f4090
NS
6277@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6278@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6279@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6280@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6281@cindex round up location counter
6282@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6283@cindex round up expression
6284@cindex align expression
6285Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6286to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6287doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6288arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6289expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6290equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6291
6292Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6293next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6294variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6295input sections:
252b5132
RH
6296@smallexample
6297@group
6298SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6299 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6300 *(.data)
6301 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6302 @}
6303@dots{} @}
6304@end group
6305@end smallexample
6306@noindent
6307The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6308a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6309a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6310of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6311
6312The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6313
362c1d1a
NS
6314@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6315@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6316@cindex section alignment
6317Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6318been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6319evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6320the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6321value in that section.
6322@smallexample
6323@group
6324SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6325 .output @{
6326 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6327 @dots{}
6328 @}
6329@dots{} @}
6330@end group
6331@end smallexample
6332
252b5132
RH
6333@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6334@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6335This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6336scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6337section.
6338
2d20f7bf
JJ
6339@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6340@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6341This is equivalent to either
6342@smallexample
6343(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6344@end smallexample
6345or
6346@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6347(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6348 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6349@end smallexample
6350@noindent
6351depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6352for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6353@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6354If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6355memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6356bytes in the on-disk file.
6357
6358This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6359any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6360@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6361be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6362running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6363that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6364page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6365
6366@noindent
6367Example:
6368@smallexample
6369 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6370@end smallexample
6371
6372@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6373@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6374This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6375evaluation purposes.
6376
6377@smallexample
6378 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6379@end smallexample
6380
a4f5ad88
JJ
6381@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6382@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6383This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6384@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6385When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6386does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6387@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6388argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6389script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6390@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6391padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6392section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6393
6394@smallexample
6395 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6396@end smallexample
6397
252b5132
RH
6398@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6399@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6400@cindex symbol defaults
6401Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6402defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6403return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6404default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6405shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6406the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6407existed, its value is preserved:
6408
6409@smallexample
6410@group
6411SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6412 .text : @{
6413 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6414 @dots{}
6415 @}
6416 @dots{}
6417@}
6418@end group
6419@end smallexample
6420
3ec57632
NC
6421@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6422@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6423Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6424
252b5132
RH
6425@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6426@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6427@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6428Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6429Section LMA}).
6430
2e53f7d6
NC
6431@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6432@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6433Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6434@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6435
252b5132
RH
6436@kindex MAX
6437@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6438Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6439
6440@kindex MIN
6441@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6442Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6443
6444@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6445@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6446@cindex unallocated address, next
6447Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6448This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6449use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6450output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6451
3ec57632
NC
6452@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6453@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6454Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6455
ba916c8a
MM
6456@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6457@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6458Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6459value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6460@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6461will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6462can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6463``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6464name.
6465
252b5132
RH
6466@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6467@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6468@cindex section size
6469Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6470been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6471evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6472@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6473@smallexample
6474@group
6475SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6476 .output @{
6477 .start = . ;
6478 @dots{}
6479 .end = . ;
6480 @}
6481 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6482 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6483@dots{} @}
6484@end group
6485@end smallexample
6486
6487@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6488@itemx sizeof_headers
6489@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6490@cindex header size
6491Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6492information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6493this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6494choose, to facilitate paging.
6495
6496@cindex not enough room for program headers
6497@cindex program headers, not enough room
6498When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6499@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6500number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6501addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6502additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6503room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6504the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6505script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6506you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6507command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6508@end table
6509
6510@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6511@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6512@cindex implicit linker scripts
6513If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6514an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6515linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6516linker will report an error.
6517
6518An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6519
6520Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6521assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6522commands.
6523
6524Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6525at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6526read. This can affect archive searching.
6527
6528@ifset GENERIC
6529@node Machine Dependent
6530@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6531
6532@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6533@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6534sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6535functionality are not listed.
6536
6537@menu
36f63dca
NC
6538@ifset H8300
6539* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6540@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6541@ifset M68HC11
6542* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6543@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6544@ifset ARM
6545* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6546@end ifset
6547@ifset HPPA
6548* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6549@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6550@ifset M68K
6551* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6552@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6553@ifset MIPS
6554* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6555@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6556@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6557* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6558@end ifset
2469cfa2 6559@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6560* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6561@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6562@ifset NDS32
6563* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6564@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6565@ifset NIOSII
6566* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6567@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6568@ifset POWERPC
6569* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6570@end ifset
6571@ifset POWERPC64
6572* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6573@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6574@ifset S/390
6575* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6576@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6577@ifset SPU
6578* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6579@end ifset
74459f0e 6580@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6581* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6582@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6583@ifset WIN32
6584* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6585@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6586@ifset XTENSA
6587* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6588@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6589@end menu
6590@end ifset
6591
252b5132
RH
6592@ifset H8300
6593@ifclear GENERIC
6594@raisesections
6595@end ifclear
6596
6597@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6598@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6599
6600@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6601For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6602you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6603
6604@table @emph
6605@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6606@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6607@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6608targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6609program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6610respectively.
6611
6612@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6613@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6614@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6615@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6616sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6617page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6618(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6619@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6620top page of memory).
1502569c 6621
81f5558e
NC
6622@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6623indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6624displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6625the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6626@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6627whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6628range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6629
1502569c 6630@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6631@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6632biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6633which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6634page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6635(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6636@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6637the top page of memory).
6638
6639@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6640@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
664132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6642changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6643(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6644@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6645the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6646@end table
6647
6648@ifclear GENERIC
6649@lowersections
6650@end ifclear
6651@end ifset
6652
36f63dca 6653@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6654@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6655@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6656@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6657@node Renesas
6658@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6659
c2dcd04e
NC
6660@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6661H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6662options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6663@end ifset
6664@end ifclear
6665
36f63dca
NC
6666@ifset ARM
6667@ifclear GENERIC
6668@raisesections
6669@end ifclear
6670
93fd0973
SC
6671@ifset M68HC11
6672@ifclear GENERIC
6673@raisesections
6674@end ifclear
6675
6676@node M68HC11/68HC12
6677@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6678
6679@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6680
6681@subsection Linker Relaxation
6682
6683For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6684optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6685
6686@table @emph
6687@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6688@item relaxing address modes
6689@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6690targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6691program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6692respectively.
6693
6694@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6695transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6696page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6697
6698@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6699When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6700of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6701addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6702@code{bset} instructions.
6703
6704@end table
6705
6706@subsection Trampoline Generation
6707
6708@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6709@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6710For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6711call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6712will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6713trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6714case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6715point to the function trampoline.
6716
6717@ifclear GENERIC
6718@lowersections
6719@end ifclear
6720@end ifset
6721
36f63dca 6722@node ARM
3674e28a 6723@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6724
6725@cindex ARM interworking support
6726@kindex --support-old-code
6727For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6728between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6729been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6730line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6731libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6732option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6733given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6734which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6735the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6736non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6737
6738@cindex thumb entry point
6739@cindex entry point, thumb
6740@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6741The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6742@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6743But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6744branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6745executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6746
ce11ba6c
KT
6747@cindex PE import table prefixing
6748@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6749The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6750the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6751element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6752import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6753
e489d0ae
PB
6754@cindex BE8
6755@kindex --be8
6756The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6757executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6758objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6759option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6760little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6761
3674e28a
PB
6762@cindex TARGET1
6763@kindex --target1-rel
6764@kindex --target1-abs
6765The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6766@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6767or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6768and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6769
6770@cindex TARGET2
6771@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6772The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6773@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6774meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6775@table @samp
6776@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6777@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6778@item abs
6779@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6780@item got-rel
6781@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6782@end table
6783
319850b4
JB
6784@cindex FIX_V4BX
6785@kindex --fix-v4bx
6786The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6787specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6788interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6789also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6790
6791In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6792linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6793@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6794
6795In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6796relocations are ignored.
6797
845b51d6
PB
6798@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6799@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6800Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6801relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6802
6803@smallexample
6804TST rM, #1
6805MOVEQ PC, rM
6806BX Rn
6807@end smallexample
6808
6809This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6810and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6811condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6812
33bfe774
JB
6813@cindex USE_BLX
6814@kindex --use-blx
6815The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6816BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6817situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6818code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6819each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6820
6821This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6822specify it if you are using that target.
6823
c6dd86c6
JB
6824@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6825@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6826The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6827bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6828instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6829to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6830the support code can read the intended values.
6831
6832The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6833intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6834and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6835intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6836full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6837you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6838
6839If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6840enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6841@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6842mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6843vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6844@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6845
6846If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6847potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6848such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6849first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6850instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6851the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6852are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6853
2de70689
MGD
6854@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6855@kindex --fix-arm1176
6856@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6857The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6858in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6859are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6860unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6861
9d5777a3 6862Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6863Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6864http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6865
a504d23a
LA
6866@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6867@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6868
6869The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6870workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6871the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6872off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6873the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6874core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6875integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6876VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6877
6878The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6879necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6880
6881The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6882@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6883STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6884linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6885@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6886
6887If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6888potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6889such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6890replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6891branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6892then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6893
6894The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6895the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6896
6897The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6898they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6899there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6900occurs.
6901
6902The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6903PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6904large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6905cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6906occurs.
6907
bf21ed78
MS
6908@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6909@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6910The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6911warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6912enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6913linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6914using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6915not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6916
6917@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6918@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6919The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6920warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6921@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6922linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6923using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6924
726150b7
NC
6925@cindex PIC_VENEER
6926@kindex --pic-veneer
6927The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6928ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6929is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6930@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6931
6932@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6933@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6934The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6935code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6936perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6937placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6938controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6939The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6940duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6941group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6942code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6943where they should be placed.
6944
6945The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6946@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6947placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6948branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6949placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6950value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6951exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6952A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6953linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6954from the input sections.
6955
6956The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6957@samp{N = +1}.
6958
1a51c1a4
NC
6959Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6960only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6961otherwise.
6962
1db37fe6
YG
6963@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6964@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6965@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6966The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6967
6968The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6969
68fcca92
JW
6970@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6971@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6972@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6973The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6974
6975Please contact ARM for further details.
6976
1db37fe6
YG
6977@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6978@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6979@cindex Merging exidx entries
6980The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6981
6982@kindex --long-plt
6983@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6984The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6985which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6986entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6987
1f56df9d
JW
6988@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6989@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6990The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6991link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6992
4ba2ef8f
TP
6993@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6994All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6995Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6996@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6997veneers in memory.
6998
54ddd295
TP
6999@kindex --cmse-implib
7000@cindex Secure gateway import library
7001The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7002specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7003secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7004executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7005
0955507f
TP
7006@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7007@cindex Input import library
7008The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7009must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7010given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7011in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7012@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7013library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7014library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7015for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7016specified.
7017
36f63dca
NC
7018@ifclear GENERIC
7019@lowersections
7020@end ifclear
7021@end ifset
7022
7023@ifset HPPA
7024@ifclear GENERIC
7025@raisesections
7026@end ifclear
7027
7028@node HPPA ELF32
7029@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7030@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7031@kindex --multi-subspace
7032When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7033import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7034The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7035stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7036multiple sub-spaces.
7037
7038@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7039@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7040Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7041stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7042@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7043sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7044a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7045the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7046conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7047prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7048A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7049branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7050@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7051@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7052detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7053positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7054
7055Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7056single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7057create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7058large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7059
7060@ifclear GENERIC
7061@lowersections
7062@end ifclear
7063@end ifset
7064
7fb9f789
NC
7065@ifset M68K
7066@ifclear GENERIC
7067@raisesections
7068@end ifclear
7069
7070@node M68K
7071@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7072
7073@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7074@kindex --got=@var{type}
7075The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7076The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7077@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7078the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7079@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7080entries only at non-negative offsets.
7081@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7082entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7083support such GOTs.
7084@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7085output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7086file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7087files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7088
7089@ifclear GENERIC
7090@lowersections
7091@end ifclear
7092@end ifset
7093
833794fc
MR
7094@ifset MIPS
7095@ifclear GENERIC
7096@raisesections
7097@end ifclear
7098
7099@node MIPS
7100@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7101
7102@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7103@kindex --insn32
7104@kindex --no-insn32
7105The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7106microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7107in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7108used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7109or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7110including 16-bit ones where possible.
7111
8b10b0b3
MR
7112@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7113@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7114@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7115The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7116control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7117@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7118relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7119calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7120relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7121instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7122or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7123the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7124
833794fc
MR
7125@ifclear GENERIC
7126@lowersections
7127@end ifclear
7128@end ifset
7129
36f63dca
NC
7130@ifset MMIX
7131@ifclear GENERIC
7132@raisesections
7133@end ifclear
7134
7135@node MMIX
7136@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7137For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7138@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7139understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7140can translate between the two formats.
7141
7142There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7143Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7144registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7145equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7146@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7147global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7148this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7149symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7150
7a2de473
HPN
7151Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7152@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7153The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7154of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7155
7156Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7157are left out from an mmo file.
7158
7159@ifclear GENERIC
7160@lowersections
7161@end ifclear
7162@end ifset
7163
7164@ifset MSP430
7165@ifclear GENERIC
7166@raisesections
7167@end ifclear
7168
7169@node MSP430
7170@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7171For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7172will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7173just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7174
7175@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7176The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7177
7178@table @code
7179@item @samp{.vectors}
7180Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7181
7182@item @samp{.bootloader}
7183Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7184in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7185
7186@item @samp{.infomem}
7187Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7188this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7189
c0065db7 7190@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7191This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7192in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7193
7194@item @samp{.noinit}
7195Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7196
c0065db7 7197The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7198@end table
7199
7ef3addb
JL
7200@table @option
7201@cindex MSP430 Options
7202@kindex --code-region
7203@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7204This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7205argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7206using this option.
7207
7208@kindex --data-region
7209@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7210This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7211[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7212for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7213
7214@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7215@item --disable-sec-transformation
7216Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7217and @code{--data-region} options.
7218This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7219wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7220not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7221@end table
7222
36f63dca
NC
7223@ifclear GENERIC
7224@lowersections
7225@end ifclear
7226@end ifset
7227
35c08157
KLC
7228@ifset NDS32
7229@ifclear GENERIC
7230@raisesections
7231@end ifclear
7232
7233@node NDS32
7234@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7235@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7236For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7237relaxes objects according to these options.
7238
7239@table @code
7240@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7241Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7242
7243@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7244Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7245
7246@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7247Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7248
7249@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7250Export the EX9 table after linking.
7251
7252@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7253Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7254
7255@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7256Update the existing EX9 table.
7257
7258@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7259Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7260
7261@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7262Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7263
7264@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7265Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7266
7267@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7268Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7269@end table
7270
7271@ifclear GENERIC
7272@lowersections
7273@end ifclear
7274@end ifset
7275
78058a5e
SL
7276@ifset NIOSII
7277@ifclear GENERIC
7278@raisesections
7279@end ifclear
7280
7281@node Nios II
7282@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7283@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7284@kindex --relax on Nios II
7285
7286Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7287transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7288which may result in @command{ld} giving
7289@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7290The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7291trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7292outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7293trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7294be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7295larger than 256MB.
7296
7297The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7298is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7299@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7300locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7301source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7302register as a temporary.
7303
7304Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7305relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7306option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7307
7308@ifclear GENERIC
7309@lowersections
7310@end ifclear
7311@end ifset
7312
2a60a7a8
AM
7313@ifset POWERPC
7314@ifclear GENERIC
7315@raisesections
7316@end ifclear
7317
7318@node PowerPC ELF32
7319@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7320@cindex PowerPC long branches
7321@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7322Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7323displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7324@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7325@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7326the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7327section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7328section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7329@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7330both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7331considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7332
7333@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7334@table @option
7335@cindex PowerPC PLT
7336@kindex --bss-plt
7337@item --bss-plt
7338Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7339generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7340the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7341writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7342@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7343PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7344compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7345BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7346
016687f8
AM
7347@kindex --secure-plt
7348@item --secure-plt
7349@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7350@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7351when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7352layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7353style BSS PLT.
7354
2a60a7a8
AM
7355@cindex PowerPC GOT
7356@kindex --sdata-got
7357@item --sdata-got
7358The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7359sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7360@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7361section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7362@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7363@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7364@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7365@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7366PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7367pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7368GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7369really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7370
7371@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7372@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7373@item --emit-stub-syms
7374This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7375symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7376
7377@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7378@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7379@item --no-tls-optimize
7380PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7381sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7382disable the optimization.
7383@end table
7384
7385@ifclear GENERIC
7386@lowersections
7387@end ifclear
7388@end ifset
7389
7390@ifset POWERPC64
7391@ifclear GENERIC
7392@raisesections
7393@end ifclear
7394
7395@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7396@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7397
7398@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7399@table @option
7400@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7401@kindex --stub-group-size
7402@item --stub-group-size
7403Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7404by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7405@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7406sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7407a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7408the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7409conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7410prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7411A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7412branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7413@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7414@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7415detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7416positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7417
7418Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7419single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7420create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7421large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7422
7423@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7424@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7425@item --emit-stub-syms
7426This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7427symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7428
7429@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7430@kindex --dotsyms
7431@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7432@item --dotsyms
7433@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7434These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7435in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7436function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7437code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7438properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7439to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7440@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7441dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7442feature.
7443
7ae4ea7d
AM
7444@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7445@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7446@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7447@item --save-restore-funcs
7448@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7449These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7450provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7451@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7452function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7453link.
7454
2a60a7a8
AM
7455@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7456@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7457@item --no-tls-optimize
7458PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7459sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7460disable the optimization.
7461
7c9cf415
AM
7462@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7463@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7464@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7465@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7466@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7467These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7468stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7469an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7470@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7471stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7472option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7473Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7474slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7475application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7476normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7477
2a60a7a8
AM
7478@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7479@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7480@item --no-opd-optimize
7481PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7482corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7483the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7484Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7485
7486@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7487@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7488@item --non-overlapping-opd
7489Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7490@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7491the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7492entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7493
7494@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7495@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7496@item --no-toc-optimize
7497PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7498entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7499reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7500marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7501marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7502relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7503unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7504reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7505discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7506reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7507code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7508optimization.
7509
7510@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7511@kindex --no-multi-toc
7512@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7513If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7514@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7515where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7516entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7517total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7518grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7519TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7520calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7521help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
752264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7523Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7524
7525@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7526@kindex --no-toc-sort
7527@item --no-toc-sort
7528By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7529happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7530placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7531with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7532referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7533@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7534results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7535off this feature.
7536
7537@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7538@kindex --plt-align
7539@kindex --no-plt-align
7540@item --plt-align
7541@itemx --no-plt-align
7542Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7543aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7544boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7545specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7546specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7547if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7548PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7549
7550@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7551@kindex --plt-static-chain
7552@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7553@item --plt-static-chain
7554@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7555Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7556chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7557chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7558
7559@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7560@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7561@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7562@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7563@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7564With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7565lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7566another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7567order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7568memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7569barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7570looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7571seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7572default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7573
7574@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7575@kindex --plt-localentry
7576@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7577@item --plt-localentry
7578@itemx --no-localentry
7579ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7580ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7581(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7582Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7583or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7584functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7585in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7586interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7587including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7588to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7589complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7590care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7591@end table
7592
7593@ifclear GENERIC
7594@lowersections
7595@end ifclear
7596@end ifset
7597
b4cbbe8f
AK
7598@ifset S/390
7599@ifclear GENERIC
7600@raisesections
7601@end ifclear
7602
7603@node S/390 ELF
7604@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7605
7606@cindex S/390 ELF options
7607@table @option
7608
7609@cindex S/390
7610@kindex --s390-pgste
7611@item --s390-pgste
7612This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7613segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7614binaries marked that way.
7615@end table
7616
7617@ifclear GENERIC
7618@lowersections
7619@end ifclear
7620@end ifset
7621
49fa1e15
AM
7622@ifset SPU
7623@ifclear GENERIC
7624@raisesections
7625@end ifclear
7626
7627@node SPU ELF
7628@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7629
7630@cindex SPU ELF options
7631@table @option
7632
7633@cindex SPU plugins
7634@kindex --plugin
7635@item --plugin
7636This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7637
7638@cindex SPU overlays
7639@kindex --no-overlays
7640@item --no-overlays
7641Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7642regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7643@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7644turns off all this special overlay handling.
7645
7646@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7647@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7648@item --emit-stub-syms
7649This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7650symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7651
7652@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7653@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7654@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7655This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7656function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7657on calls to non-overlay regions.
7658
7659@cindex SPU local store size
7660@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7661@item --local-store=lo:hi
7662@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7663the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7664range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7665
c0065db7 7666@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7667@kindex --stack-analysis
7668@item --stack-analysis
7669SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7670unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7671under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7672@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7673@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7674determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7675for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7676for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7677for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7678find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7679and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7680under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7681dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7682is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7683and calls will be given.
7684
c0065db7 7685@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7686@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7687@item --emit-stack-syms
7688This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7689in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7690These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7691functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7692functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7693such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7694The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7695@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7696@end table
7697
7698@ifclear GENERIC
7699@lowersections
7700@end ifclear
7701@end ifset
7702
36f63dca
NC
7703@ifset TICOFF
7704@ifclear GENERIC
7705@raisesections
7706@end ifclear
7707
7708@node TI COFF
7709@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7710@cindex TI COFF versions
7711@kindex --format=@var{version}
7712The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7713TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7714also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7715format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7716header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7717
7718@ifclear GENERIC
7719@lowersections
7720@end ifclear
7721@end ifset
7722
2ca22b03
NC
7723@ifset WIN32
7724@ifclear GENERIC
7725@raisesections
7726@end ifclear
7727
7728@node WIN32
7729@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7730
c0065db7 7731This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7732See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7733command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7734
7735@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7736@cindex import libraries
7737@item import libraries
69da35b5 7738The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7739libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7740regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7741archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7742support for creating such libraries provided with the
7743@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7744
c0065db7
RM
7745@item exporting DLL symbols
7746@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7747The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7748
7749@table @emph
7750@item using auto-export functionality
7751@cindex using auto-export functionality
7752By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7753which is controlled by the following command line options:
7754
0a5d968e
NC
7755@itemize
7756@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7757@item --exclude-symbols
7758@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7759@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7760@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7761@end itemize
7762
09e2aba4
DK
7763When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7764(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7765symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7766often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7767private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7768options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7769exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7770final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7771
7772If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7773command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7774if either of the following are true:
7775
7776@itemize
7777@item A DEF file is used.
7778@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7779@end itemize
dc8465bf 7780
c0065db7
RM
7781@item using a DEF file
7782@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7783Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7784an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7785exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7786name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7787command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7788
7789@example
7790gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7791@end example
7792
0a5d968e
NC
7793Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7794@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7795
dc8465bf
NC
7796Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7797
7798@example
4b5bd4e7 7799LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7800
7801EXPORTS
7802foo
7803bar
7804_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7805another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7806var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7807doo = foo == foo2
7808eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7809@end example
dc8465bf 7810
7fcab871 7811This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7812symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7813alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7814by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7815@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7816@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7817export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7818in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7819symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7820
6b31ad16
DS
7821The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7822name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7823the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7824
b45619c0
NC
7825When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7826library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7827@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7828executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7829
7830With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7831specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7832non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7833
7834If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7835or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7836filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7837
4b5bd4e7
DS
7838The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7839
7840@example
7841EXPORTS
7842 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7843 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7844 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7845@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7846
7847Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7848@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7849@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7850@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7851Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7852@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7853string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7854
7855The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7856
7857@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7858will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7859by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7860linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7861library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7862
7863@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7864The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7865the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7866@code{*_imp__foo}).
7867
7868@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7869well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7870read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7871variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7872the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7873extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7874application will behave unexpectedly.
7875
7876@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7877it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7878symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7879API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7880the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7881
4b5bd4e7
DS
7882See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7883other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7884
7885@cindex creating a DEF file
7886While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7887with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7888
7889@item Using decorations
7890@cindex Using decorations
7891Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7892itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7893declared as:
7894
7895@example
7896__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7897__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7898@end example
7899
7900All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7901any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7902this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7903the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7904
7905Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7906decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7907instead:
7908
7909@example
7910__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7911__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7912@end example
7913
c0065db7
RM
7914This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7915when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7916variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7917code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7918of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7919omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7920@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7921information.
c0065db7 7922@end table
dc8465bf 7923
2ca22b03
NC
7924@cindex automatic data imports
7925@item automatic data imports
7926The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7927by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7928compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7929issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7930code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7931c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7932initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7933decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7934platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7935command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7936The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7937suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7938trigger the feature's use.
7939
c0065db7 7940auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7941additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7942
c0065db7 7943"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7944documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7945
c0065db7
RM
7946The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7947occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7948One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7949below.
7950
7951@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7952For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7953object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7954offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7955field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7956in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7957without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7958The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7959references.
7960
c0065db7
RM
7961The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7962be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7963themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7964runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7965compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7966support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7967run without error on an older system.
7968
c0065db7
RM
7969@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7970enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7971
7972@cindex direct linking to a dll
7973@item direct linking to a dll
7974The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7975including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7976libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7977traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7978libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7979function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7980though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7981storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7982tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7983large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7984
c0065db7 7985Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7986@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7987of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7988perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7989select the dll instead of an import library.
7990
2ca22b03 7991
69da35b5
NC
7992For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7993to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7994
7995@example
45e948fe
NC
7996libxxx.dll.a
7997xxx.dll.a
7998libxxx.a
7999xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8000libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8001cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8002libxxx.dll
8003xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8004@end example
8005
69da35b5
NC
8006before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8007
c0065db7
RM
8008(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8009where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8010@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8011file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8012@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8013
c0065db7
RM
8014Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8015@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8016was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8017various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8018could coexist on the same machine.
8019
2ca22b03
NC
8020The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8021applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8022libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8023
8024@example
8025bin/
8026 cygxxx.dll
8027lib/
8028 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8029 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8030@end example
8031
c0065db7
RM
8032Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8033done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8034
80351. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8036@example
8037gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8038@end example
2ca22b03 8039
69da35b5
NC
8040However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8041(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8042@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8043not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8044
2ca22b03
NC
80452. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8046directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8047should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8048making the app/dll.
8049
8050@example
8051ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8052@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8053
8054Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8055
8056@example
8057gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8058@end example
69da35b5
NC
8059
8060This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8061perfectly legal
8062
8063@example
8064bin/
8065 cygxxx-5.dll
8066lib/
c0065db7 8067 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8068@end example
8069
dc8465bf 8070Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8071even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8072@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8073
8074Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8075wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8076
80771. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8078work with auto-imported data.
8079
dc8465bf
NC
80802. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8081import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8082symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8083for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8084possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8085
45e948fe
NC
80863. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8087critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8088in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8089stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8090
69da35b5 8091So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8092true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8093a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8094binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8095massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8096requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8097will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8098
c0065db7 8099@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8100@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8101@item adding additional names
8102Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8103A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8104exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8105when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8106import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8107
c0065db7 8108@example
dc8465bf
NC
8109LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8110
8111EXPORTS
c0065db7 8112foo
dc8465bf 8113_foo = foo
c0065db7 8114@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8115
8116The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8117
8118Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8119source code using the "weak" attribute:
8120
c0065db7
RM
8121@example
8122void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8123void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8124@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8125
8126See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8127symbols.
8128
8129@item renaming symbols
8130Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8131kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8132@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8133DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8134created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8135
c0065db7 8136@example
dc8465bf
NC
8137LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8138
8139EXPORTS
8140_foo = foo
c0065db7 8141@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8142
8143The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8144@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8145@end table
dc8465bf 8146
0a5d968e 8147Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8148unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8149If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8150@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8151that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8152@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8153renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8154to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8155the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8156In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8157which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8158
8159@cindex weak externals
8160@item weak externals
8161The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8162weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8163defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8164are three variants of weak externals:
8165@itemize
8166@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8167called lazy externals.
8168@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8169This form is not presently implemented.
8170@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8171implemented.
8172@end itemize
8173As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8174are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8175uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8176
8177@cindex aligned common symbols
8178@item aligned common symbols
8179As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8180desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8181the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8182carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8183by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8184tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8185but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8186warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8187
2ca22b03
NC
8188@end table
8189
8190@ifclear GENERIC
8191@lowersections
8192@end ifclear
8193@end ifset
8194
e0001a05
NC
8195@ifset XTENSA
8196@ifclear GENERIC
8197@raisesections
8198@end ifclear
8199
8200@node Xtensa
8201@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8202
8203@cindex Xtensa processors
8204The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8205@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8206specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8207keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8208example, with the command:
8209
8210@smallexample
8211SECTIONS
8212@{
8213 .text : @{
8214 *(.literal .text)
8215 @}
8216@}
8217@end smallexample
8218
8219@noindent
8220@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8221and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8222literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8223interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8224group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8225files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8226and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8227
43cd72b9 8228@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8229@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8230Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8231provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8232is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8233literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8234will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8235location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8236the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8237unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8238@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8239range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8240
8241For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8242to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8243instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8244instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8245instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8246@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8247hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8248By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8249switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8250density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8251instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8252performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8253linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8254a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8255
8256The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8257control the linker:
8258
8259@cindex Xtensa options
8260@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8261@item --size-opt
8262When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8263more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8264no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8265alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8266preserve the correctness of the code.
8267@end table
e0001a05
NC
8268
8269@ifclear GENERIC
8270@lowersections
8271@end ifclear
8272@end ifset
8273
252b5132
RH
8274@ifclear SingleFormat
8275@node BFD
8276@chapter BFD
8277
8278@cindex back end
8279@cindex object file management
8280@cindex object formats available
8281@kindex objdump -i
8282The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8283These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8284object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8285format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8286it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8287associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8288object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8289(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8290list all the formats available for your configuration.
8291
8292@cindex BFD requirements
8293@cindex requirements for BFD
8294As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8295several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8296BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8297formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8298been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8299BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8300may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8301
8302One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8303mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8304useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8305conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8306
8307@menu
8308* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8309@end menu
8310
8311@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8312@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8313@cindex opening object files
8314@include bfdsumm.texi
8315@end ifclear
8316
8317@node Reporting Bugs
8318@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8319@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8320@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8321
ff5dcc92 8322Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8323
8324Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8325it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8326to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8327work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8328@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8329
8330In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8331information that enables us to fix the bug.
8332
8333@menu
8334* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8335* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8336@end menu
8337
8338@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8339@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8340@cindex bug criteria
8341
8342If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8343
8344@itemize @bullet
8345@cindex fatal signal
8346@cindex linker crash
8347@cindex crash of linker
8348@item
8349If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8350@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8351
8352@cindex error on valid input
8353@item
ff5dcc92 8354If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8355
8356@cindex invalid input
8357@item
ff5dcc92 8358If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8359may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8360object files are correct.
8361
8362@item
8363If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8364improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8365@end itemize
8366
8367@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8368@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8369@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8370@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8371
8372A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8373products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8374recommend you contact that organization first.
8375
8376You can find contact information for many support companies and
8377individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8378distribution.
8379
ad22bfe8 8380@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8381Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8382@value{BUGURL}.
8383@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8384
8385The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8386@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8387fact or leave it out, state it!
8388
8389Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8390problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8391assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8392matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8393the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8394location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8395were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8396into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8397specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8398and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8399
8400Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8401the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8402on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8403
8404Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8405bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8406respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8407You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8408
8409To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8410
8411@itemize @bullet
8412@item
ff5dcc92 8413The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8414the @samp{--version} argument.
8415
8416Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8417the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8418
8419@item
ff5dcc92 8420Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8421patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8422
8423@item
8424The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8425version number.
8426
8427@item
ff5dcc92 8428What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8429``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8430
8431@item
8432The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8433observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8434list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8435sufficient.
8436
8437If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8438and then we might not encounter the bug.
8439
8440@item
8441A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8442bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8443provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8444bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8445state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8446requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8447we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8448attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8449
8450If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8451@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8452object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8453@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8454how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8455
8456@item
8457A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8458incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8459
ff5dcc92 8460Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8461will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8462not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8463a chance to make a mistake.
8464
8465Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8466say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8467copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8468C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8469and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8470fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8471you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8472any conclusion from our observations.
8473
8474@item
ff5dcc92 8475If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8476diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8477@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8478If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8479context, not by line number.
8480
8481The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8482sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8483@end itemize
8484
8485Here are some things that are not necessary:
8486
8487@itemize @bullet
8488@item
8489A description of the envelope of the bug.
8490
8491Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8492which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8493changes will not affect it.
8494
8495This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8496will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8497with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8498We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8499
8500Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8501of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8502output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8503less time, and so on.
8504
8505However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8506report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8507
8508@item
8509A patch for the bug.
8510
8511A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8512the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8513a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8514to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8515
ff5dcc92 8516Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8517construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8518through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8519able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8520fixed.
8521
8522And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8523patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8524help us to understand.
8525
8526@item
8527A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8528
8529Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8530things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8531@end itemize
8532
8533@node MRI
8534@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8535@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8536To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8537linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8538alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8539described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8540simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8541@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8542linker commands; these commands are described here.
8543
8544In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8545file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8546features to make use of them.
8547
8548You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8549@samp{-c} command-line option.
8550
8551Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8552command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8553blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8554MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8555issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8556
8557Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8558
8559You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8560lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8561The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8562
8563@table @code
8564@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8565@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8566@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8567Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8568the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8569@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8570your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8571script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8572commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8573input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8574@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8575
8576@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8577@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8578Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8579in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8580
8581@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8582
8583@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8584@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8585Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8586@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8587
8588@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8589@item BASE @var{expression}
8590Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8591absolute addresses) in the output file.
8592
8593@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8594@item CHIP @var{expression}
8595@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8596This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8597
8598@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8599@item END
8600This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8601
8602@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8603@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8604Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8605language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8606
8607@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8608@item
252b5132
RH
8609S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8610
252b5132
RH
8611@item
8612COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8613@samp{COFF}
8614@end enumerate
8615
8616@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8617@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8618Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8619@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8620
8621The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8622same line, with no change in its effect.
8623
8624@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8625@item LOAD @var{filename}
8626@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8627Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8628same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8629command line.
8630
8631@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8632@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8633@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8634MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8635option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8636
8637@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8638@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8639@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8640Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8641order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8642script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8643sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8644file, in the order specified.
8645
8646@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8647@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8648@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8649@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8650Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8651@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8652
8653@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8654@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8655@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8656@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8657You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8658specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8659If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8660@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8661@end table
8662
793c5807
NC
8663@node GNU Free Documentation License
8664@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8665@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8666
370b66a1
CD
8667@node LD Index
8668@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8669
8670@printindex cp
8671
8672@tex
7ca01ed9 8673% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8674% meantime:
8675\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8676\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8677\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8678\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8679\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8680\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8681\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8682\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8683\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8684% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8685@end tex
8686
252b5132 8687@bye
This page took 2.045807 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.